Home

HP Remote Graphics Software 5.3.0 User Guide

1. e If there is a break in the RGS connection the smartcard reader will become locally accessible If Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection RDC is used to connect from the Local Computer to the Remote Computer it s possible to get into a situation where the smartcard reader can t be used to log into the Remote Computer for details on the interoperability of RGS and RDC see Section 2 19 Interoperability of RGS and Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection This situation can arise as follows 1 The user uses a smartcard reader to log into the Remote Computer with RDC Assume that this login session is established from the user s home 2 Assume further that the user inadvertently leaves the RDC login session established and departs for work 3 From work the user attempts to log into the Remote Computer with RGS using an at work smartcard reader in Easy Login mode which is required for the smartcard reader as noted previously Because the home RDC login session is still active RGS will require the user to authenticate the connection which is not normally required with Easy Login However the user may not have a login name and password the user may be totally relying on smartcard readers at home and at work to log into the Remote Computer If the user is unable to authenticate the connection with a user name and password the USB smartcard reader will not be remotely mounted to the Remote Computer and the user will not be abl
2. About Event Logging Using Event Logging Starting with Windows Vista there is a new event log service For more information see Windows Event Log Sender event logging on Windows 166 10 Remote Application Termination This chapter describes how to create a Windows agent on the Sender that provides Remote Application Termination Remote application refers to user applications that are running on the Remote Computer Sender The sample agent described in this chapter is designed to terminate applications on the Sender when an RGS disconnect occurs 10 1 RGS connection and user status As described in Section 2 9 Establishing an RGS connection using Standard Login an RGS connection normally require two authentication steps 1 The first authentication step is from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender this is called authenticating the RGS connection The dialog for this authentication step is generated and displayed by the RGS Receiver on the Local Computer 2 The second authentication step is when logging into or unlocking the Remote Computer desktop session this is called logging into the Remote Computer The login or unlock dialog is generated by the Remote Computer and is displayed in the Remote Display Window on the Local Computer A desktop session can operate independently of the RGS connection This allows a user to disconnect and reconnect to deskt
3. Get the start and count Microsoft does not specify what reasons these functions could fail so we cannot ensure success Check the return value GetOldestEventLogRecord h amp dwCurrentStart false GetNumberOfEventLogRecords h amp dwCurrentCount false CloseEventLog h report error unable to obtain event logs return CloseEventLog h false report error status here return there are no events and the index is 0 if dwCurrentCount 0 dwNewiIndex 0 a dwNewIndex dwCurrentStart dwCurrentCount 1 If the new index is different than the current then update the current and process the current event Otherwise we sleep for a while if dwNewlIndex dwCurrentIndex We have at least one new event Print out the last event dwCurrentiIindex dwNewIndex if dwNewlIndex if processEvent eventServer eventSource dwCurrentIndex event processing error here return else No new events Sleep for 1 second Sleep 1000 waitedFor 1 return main setup and initialize agent monitorEvents EVENT SERVER EVENT SRC seconds cleanup agent here or send alerts may wish to return status from monitorEvents Remote Application Termination 172 10 4 Agent design issues Designing an agent to provide Remote Application Termination requires consideration of a number of issues in order to minimize data loss and determine when a last resor
4. Receiver default properties Lowest Properties set by methods higher on the list override properties set by methods lower on the list For example a Receiver command line property can override a property specified in the rgreceiverconfig file Similarly an archive file property saved from the previous Receiver Control Panel session can override a Receiver default property Properties set using the Receiver Control Panel The Receiver Control Panel enables the user to modify the values of many Receiver properties For example as described in Section 6 6 Remote Clipboard operation the user can enable disable Remote Clipboard using the Receiver Control Panel This affects the Rgreceiver Clipboard IsEnabled property as described in Section 8 5 10 Receiver Remote Clipboard properties Receiver command line properties See Section 8 3 Setting properties on the command line rgreceivercontig file properties See Section 8 2 Setting property values in a configuration file Archive file properties When the Receiver is run the user can change a number of properties using menus on the Receiver Control Panel and the Remote Display Window When the Receiver exits it saves the state of any properties that were changed by the user these are known as archive file properties Receiver default properties The Receiver has a set of default properties that are built into the Receiver These are identical to the proper
5. See Chapter 11 Optimizing RGS performance e f using a Linux Receiver verity that audio has been installed correctly as described in Section 3 2 3 Installing audio on the Linux Receiver e See the troubleshooting suggestions in Section 6 2 5 Potential audio issues e Verify that USB has been correctly configured during Receiver installation on Windows as described in Section 3 1 1 Installing the Receiver on Windows e See the troubleshooting suggestions in Section 6 3 7 Troubleshooting remote USB Troubleshooting RGS 179 13 RGS error messages This chapter lists the error messages reported by the RGS Receiver and describes potential reasons for the error MESSAGES 13 1 Receiver error messages The following table lists the errors that are reported by the RGS Receiver on the Local Computer ll E The RGS Sender has closed the connection Possible reasons include Connection lost Unable to connect to Sender Authentication failed iF The Sender may have explicitly disconnected your connection For example a user may have selected disconnect all connections from the Sender icon or Sender GUI or the user may have logged off Another user has connected to the Sender using the same username and password If you connected to a desktop that was not logged in and another user logged in your connection will be disconnected If you were connected to a logged in des
6. for further details on the property Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog The default value for this property is 15 seconds When connecting to a Linux Remote Computer the PAM authentication often fails There are several reasons why this might occur e PAM may be configured incorrectly e The user could be entering incorrect credentials e The timeouts are too short See Section 3 2 4 Installing the Sender on Linux to determine if PAM is correctly configured See Section 6 4 Network timeouts for further details on setting timeouts The user could try increasing the Receiver s network dialog timeout as well as the Sender s error and dialog timeouts to see if this helps If this does not help and the user is convinced that the timeouts are not being exceeded then it is likely a PAM authentication configuration problem The Remote Display Window is not updating and appears to be hung This is most likely caused by a network disruption You can adjust the warning timeout to get notification when this occurs You can also adjust the error timeout to disconnect and dismiss the Remote Display Window sooner The default warning timeout is two seconds The default error timeout is 30 seconds See Section 6 4 Network timeouts for further details on setting the Receiver timeouts Increasing the Receiver error dialog timeout doesn t appear to have an effect and the Receiver still disconnects This is likely caused by either
7. 1 name associated with connection 2 IP address and port number of Local Computer Data None Event Viewer Example Disconnect MYDOMAIN myusername Reference event registered to aid in interpretation of the event log by Event Viewer Signities proper startup of the RGS Sender service Event Viewer Message RGS Sender startup Strings None Data None Reference event registered to aid in interpretation of the event log by Event Viewer Signities proper shutdown of the RGS Sender service Event Viewer Message RGS Sender shutdown A connection with an associated name is set as the primary connection Event Viewer Message Set 1 as primary connection name associated with connection Data None Event Viewer Example Set MYDOMAIN myusername as primary connection Remote Application Termination 168 RGSENDER_SET_NONPRIMARY A connection with an associated name is assigned to a non primary status This may happen as a result of a logout EventID 7 Event Viewer Message Set 1 as non primary connection Strings 1 name associated with connection Data None Event Viewer Example Set MYDOMAIN myusername as non primary connection RGSENDER_ASSIGN_USER If Easy Login is enabled the assignment of the name will be deferred until login When the name is assigned this message will be EventID 8 generated Event Viewer Message Assign 1 connection to 2 original name of connection new name of c
8. Sender clipboard property for information on the Remote Clipboard properties Advanced capabilities 126 6 6 1 Remote Clipboard data transters Figure 6 25 shows the data transfer that occurs when a cut and paste is performed using Remote Clipboard In this example the cut occurs from within the Remote Computer application as initiated from the Remote Display Window and the paste occurs into the Local Computer application via the Local Window When the cut is performed the data that is cut from the Remote Computer application is transferred to the clipboard on the Remote Computer When the paste occurs the clipboard data is transferred from the Remote Computer clipboard to the Local Computer clipboard and then pasted into the Local Computer application Figure 6 25 Transfer of data when a cut and paste is performed from a Remote Display Window to a Local Window Eile _Edit_Vi i HARE rore olla isialy ls elelslol Ms Sans Seat elho E Ss 596335 E 39 28495 38755 57489 84753 W 25614 18723 39845 92745 S 92884 87134 28556 98745 By 89234 38472 27955 4893 Bza 12653 87133 2985 28745 ie 28371 98734 93853 9876 Acca ame Number Serteteses PESTFESLELEES keas Data is transferred from the Remote Data is transferred from the Computer to the Local Computer Remote Computer application to clipboard and then to the application the clipboard wh
9. When selected this option causes the Remote Display Window to snap to the edges of the monitor whenever the boundaries of the window are within 30 pixels of any edge of the monitor Image quality slide bar Sets the image quality and therefore the amount of compression Higher image quality reduces the amount of compression and therefore consumes greater network bandwidth Boost checkbox When checked will improve boost image quality for certain types of images primarily images containing significant amounts of text or lines Because of the high contrast ratio between adjacent pixels such images often don t compress well When the Boost checkbox is checked such high contrast cases will be compressed in a manner to better preserve their visual quality but at the possible expense of higher network bandwidth and or lower image update rates HP recommends that you experiment with different settings of the image quality slide bar and the Boost checkbox to find the optimal settings for your environment The Boost checkbox was added beginning with RGS 5 2 6 and requires that both the RGS Sender and Receiver be version 5 2 6 or later The Boost setting can also be controlled by the Rgreceiver ImageCodec IsBoostEnabled Receiver property Network bandwidth Displays the current network bandwidth consumed by this connection Image update rate Displays the number of image updates per second for this connection Using RGS 85 5 1 4 Rem
10. noreboot Do not reboot the system when the setup requires a reboot to complete removesettings Installing RGS 49 Removes the user specitic Receiver settings from the registry viewlicense Displays the EULA End User License Agreement for use of this software help Display usage text Installing RGS 50 Receiver installation log file Installation of the Receiver creates an installation log file This log file can be viewed by the user to obtain details about what operations were performed and view any errors that occurred during the installation process When Setup exe for the RGS Receiver is run the following log file is created C TEMP rgreceiveriInstaller log The log file is especially useful for automatic installs because installer errors are not displayed on the screen and are only viewable using the log file If the log file already exists when the installer is run the installer will remove the current contents of the log file before writing to it This prevents the log file from growing without bounds Uninstalling the RGS Receiver on Windows To uninstall the RGS Receiver use the Windows Add or Remove Programs feature from the Control Panel Select Remote Graphics Receiver and click Change Remove A dialog box will open with choices for Repair or Remove Choose Remove to uninstall the RGS Receiver On certain client computers simply re run the setup exe program that you used to originally install the Receiver i
11. and how they can be changed 8 1 Property syntax Properties are name value pairs and can contain any non whitespace characters except and The property name and property value are separated by an For example Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning 10000 In this example the name of this property is Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning and the value of the property is 10000 All RGS Receiver properties begin with Rgreceiver and all RGS Sender properties begin with Rgsender Properties can contain values of the following types string int bool and int vector Properties of type bool are set to 1 or O representing true or false respectively A property can be set to an empty value such as Rgreceiver Browser Name Properties with empty values initialize as follows e If the value of the property is of type string the value will be set to an empty string e If the value of the property is of type int vector or bool the value will be set to O 8 2 Setting property values in a contiguration tile RGS property values can be set in a configuration file The RGS Receiver uses the rgreceiverconfig file for its properties while the RGS Sender uses the file rgsenderconf ig file for its properties On Windows these files are located in the directory where the RGS Receiver and Sender are installed typically Receiver C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver rgreceiverconfig Sender C Program Files H
12. checked when an RGS connection is established therefore the licensing mechanism has no affect on downloading the RGS product and installing the RGS Sender However as described in Section 2 3 RGS licensing installing the RGS Sender without a valid license will result in an error dialog being displayed in the Remote Display Window Therefore before downloading a new RGS version and installing a new RGS Sender ensure that your RGS license entitles you to use the new RGS Sender version Again refer to the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide at www hp com support rgs_manuals for detailed information E NOTE The RGS Sender is configured to start when the Sender computer boots or in the case of Linux also when the X server starts The RGS Receiver can be started from a command line However because the Receiver can also be started from the start menu on Windows both methods of starting the Receiver on a command line and using the start menu are u described together in Section 5 1 Using RGS in Normal Mode 3 1 Installing RGS on Windows This section describes installation of the RGS Receiver and Sender on Windows See Figure 2 1 for a list of the Windows operating systems that support the RGS Receiver and Sender 3 1 1 Installing the Receiver on Windows This section describes manual and automatic installation of the RGS Receiver on Windows Manual installation of the Receiver on Windows To instal
13. e A network failure resulting in detecting lost connectivity by the Receiver resulting in a disconnected connection e The Sender timeouts are shorter than the Receiver s timeouts and the Sender disconnects the Receiver It is not always the case that network error timeouts are honored A network error timeout only establishes an upper bound on the duration of retries before returning with an error If the computer determines that network connectivity is lost and an error returns by the network stack to the Receiver then the connection will disconnect sooner than the error timeout setting If the Sender s timeout values are shorter than the Advanced capabilities 122 Receiver s the Sender may close the connection sooner than the Receiver disconnecting the Receiver If the issue continues consider increasing the Sender s error timeout value See Section 6 4 Network timeouts for further details on setting timeouts 6 4 2 Dialog timeouts RGS supports dialog timeouts which specity how long user interactions between the Local Computer and Remote Computer are allowed to take The two dialog timeout properties are e Receiver dialog timeout property This property specifies the maximum time that the Receiver Local Computer will wait for a dialog response from the Remote Computer in response to a message sent to the Remote Computer It also specities how long dialogs initiated by the Remote Computer will be displayed to the user
14. i i i i i i mH ia a a a El ey In g m cr UB a UB vsprod virksy ysprods virks chxbest45 chxbest454 chxbest456 dditest vdi 1 vdi 2 vdi 3 vidi x wek3 re se xe xp basic xp basic rgs4 xp rgs5 xp rgs5 test el GS vsprod1 virksy rgsoitin rgsS demo rgsS usb tmaini rgss EJ Ea eo p rgs5 irtual Machine Properties Oj x Hardware Options Resources E52 3 x virtual machine General xprrgss Enable debugging information VMWare Tools System Default Power Management Standby Advanced Logging I Enable logging Summary l Disable acceleration CPU Identification Mask Hiding the Nx Flag will increase VMotion compatibility between hosts at the cost of disabling certain CPU performance features For some guest operating systems and applications Hide the Mx Flag From guest f Expose the Nx Flag to guest keep current ddvanced setting values for the Hx Hag dvanced Configuration Parameters Click the Configuration Parameters button to edit the advanced configuration settings Help Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 185 Click the Configuration Parameters button in Figure A 1 to display the configuration parameters shown in Figure A 2 Figure A 2 Configuration Parameters dialog xp rgs5 irtual Machine Properties iof x Hardware Ontinns Decniweee l FSX 3 y virt
15. responder Prior to RGS 5 1 3 the number of outstanding image update requests was preset to 1 This meant that the Receiver after issuing an image update request would wait for the image update response to be completed before issuing another request Figure 8 5 shows the sequence chart for this Figure 8 5 Prior to RGS 5 1 3 only one image update would be in process at any time Sender Receiver Image update request Capture compress and encrypt the Image update response Decrypt decompress and display the Remote Computer frame buffer pixels frame buffer pixels on the Local Computer Image update request Image update response The Rgreceiver MaxImageUpdateRequests property was added to enable performance optimization in high latency network environments For example setting this property to 2 will allow the Receiver to issue a second image update request to the Sender prior to receiving the previous image update response This allows the Sender and Receiver to operate more in parallel but at the potential expense of increased network bandwidth consumption RGS properties 148 The sequence chart in Figure 8 6 shows operation for the default property value of 4 In this case the Receiver can have up to 4 image update requests outstanding at any given time When image update response 1 is received meaning that there are now 3 outstanding image update requests the Receiver can issue image update request 5 again up t
16. shift up By default the receiver ignores these key repeats in the hotkey state machine The Local Computer may be set up to process key repeats in the hotkey state machine which may be necessary for certain types of applications Note that if this setting is enabled the sequence shift down shift down space down space up will not trigger setup mode so the sequence must be typed faster if this setting is enabled Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsCtrlAltDeletePassThroughEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsCtrlAltDeletePassThroughEnabled IsMutable bool 1 When a Windows Local Computer detects a Ctrl Alt Delete key sequence it does not send the sequence to the Remote Computer only the Local Computer processes the key sequence Setting this property to 1 will result in both the Remote and Local Computers processing the key sequence Note that some third party software tools or OS configurations may be available to disable the Ctrl Alt Delete sequence on the Local Computer 8 5 10 Receiver Remote Clipboard properties Ef NOTE The Remote Clipboard functionality and properties were added with the RGS 5 1 3 release At the RGS 5 2 0 release the properties Rgreceiver Session lt N gt Clipboard IsEnabled and Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString were added Rgreceiver Clipboard IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 the Remote Clipboard setting in the Receiver Control Panel can be changed by the user If set to O the user cannot change the Remote Clipboard se
17. such as with a blade workstation the HP Remote Audio virtual device is automatically installed and the application generated audio is routed to it Audio from either the audio device or the HP Remote Audio virtual device is sent to the RGS Audio Recorder The RGS Audio Recorder captures the audio which is sent by RGS to the Local Computer The RGS Audio Player on the Local Computer decodes the received audio and sends it to the audio mixer The output of the audio mixer is sent to the Local Computer audio device The audio device drives an audio output device such as a speaker USB devices are Local a The user selects the microphone source either a USB microphone or an analog microphone The RGS Audio Recorder captures the selected microphone source b The audio captured by the RGS Audio Recorder is sent by RGS to the RGS Audio Player on the Remote Computer c The RGS Audio Player decodes the audio signal and sends it to the HP Remote Microphone virtual device d The HP Remote Microphone virtual device appears to the application as a local microphone and sends the microphone audio to the application USB devices are Remote Beginning at RGS 5 2 0 certain USB microphones can be mounted to the Remote Computer using the remote USB driver see Appendix B for the supported microphones See the previous section for a description of Remote USB operation RGS overview 37 2 17 2 Remote audio on Linux RGS on
18. user s desktop session If the Remote Computer is a blade workstation it will typically not have a monitor connected to it The above image associated with the Remote Computer is for clarity to show the source of the desktop image Local User 2 viewing primary user s desktop session The user currently controlling the mouse and keyboard is called the floor owner Only one user the floor owner can interact with the desktop at a time To transition the floor owner the current floor owner must cease using the keyboard or mouse for a short period of time 0 5 seconds If another user uses the mouse or keyboard while the current floor owner is inactive during this 5 second period floor ownership transfers to the new user In a collaboration session the shape of the local cursor is modified for the floor owner For the other remote users the local cursor is left unchanged and a remote cursor is displayed in the Remote Display Window Use of the mouse and keyboard by non primary users can be disabled by the primary user using the Sender GUI see Figure 5 16 Authorized local users will still be able to view the primary user s desktop but will be unable to interact with it Figure 5 16 Disabling of the local users mice and keyboards by the primary user Disconnect k Disable Help About Using RGS 93 Connection between a Local Computer and a Remote Computer is permitted only if the primary user all
19. 2 8 2 One to one connection Normal Mode is described in Chapter 5 Using RGS 2 Directory Mode This mode enables RGS to connect to multiple Remote Computers as described in Section 2 8 3 Many to one connection Directory Mode is based on a user created file which specifies which Remote Computers the RGS Receiver should connect to Directory Mode is described in Chapter 7 Using Directory Mode E NOTE Prior to RGS 5 2 0 RGS supported a third operating mode Enterprise Service Mode Enterprise Service Mode was based on the creation of a network service which specified which Remote Computers the RGS Receiver should connect to Enterprise Service Mode has been superseded by HP Session Allocation Manager SAM and therefore has been discontinued as of the RGS 5 2 0 release RGS overview 27 2 12 Multi monitor configurations Many computers have a frame buffer that is larger in size as measured in horizontal pixels by vertical pixels than what can be displayed on a single monitor In these situations the default operation is that a portion of the frame buffer is used allowing the utilized portion containing the Windows desktop to be displayed on a single monitor It is possible however to configure a computer so that the Windows desktop occupies the complete frame buffer this typically requires multiple monitors to view the complete frame buffer Windows desktop In Figure 2 12 the Windows desktop is conf
20. 53 Diagnoshies PROMI CN GOO sesmaria rrn SEE E EE TER EESE EEEE RES tree bitten taeaetacem 54 Quipu ofthe ROS Diagnosiics NOG sssscnsriicertiasren terieri nara r ieri Et r E Ok E ENET R RE 54 sonar a E E E E A EE E ssaceqsiben eaesnoteeeseesecananess 56 The Remote Graphics Sender service son ssssnussssiussesinssereesssrrerssrerrssrerrssrrrrsrrrrrsesresssreseerrrss 57 SD GSS ID eene E EE E E 58 Dialog to enable or disable Single Sign on and Easy Login ccccccccceecccceeeeeeecesseeceeeesseseeeeaaeeees 59 The dialog presented during Sender installation to enable Single Sign on or Easy Login 0006 60 Using the rgadmin tool to enable Single Sign On ccccccccceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesesseeeesesseeeeeesea sees 61 Addition of the GinaDLl key to the registry cccccccccseeccccceeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeseeaeeeeeeeeaaeneeees 62 Addition of the GinaDllMode key to the registry cccccccccccesseeececeeesseeeeeeeeesseeeseesessaaeeeeceeeeaeeeeees 62 Addition of the GinaDllMode key to the registry ccccccccccesseececeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeseaae nesses 64 MCW NIC eroen urna unanondeuneiauneamseoase ony tov anacsanouenidneunun save E E nun ss 76 PAIS TP SSCS nee caedispaceotee noses cae tehioceasaaes os soysatied cmannecscne iewad E E E E 76 Determining the first NIC ccccccccccceeecccceee eee eeeee cece eeeeee cease eeeeeecGG GHEE E AG GHA EEEEEEEGG HAE EEEEAG EOE EEEEEE EEE 77
21. A is also referred to as the sending computer or cut computer while computer B is referred to as the receiving computer or paste computer Figure 6 26 shows this nomenclature When discussing Remote Clipboard operation we ll generally use this nomenclature because it is independent of which computers are the Remote or Local Computers sending computer receiving computer cut computer paste computer local computer application remote computer application remote computer local computer UAPrPOWVvU 6Froa C L I P B O A R D Computer A Computer B Figure 6 26 Cut and paste computer nomenclature Figure 6 27 show a system consisting of three Remote Computers connected by RGS to the Local Computer The three desktops of the Remote Computers are displayed in three Remote Display Windows on the Local Computer In this system assume the Local Computer user has just performed a cut operation on the cut computer via one of the Remote Display Windows At this point the user can do a paste to any or all of the paste computers If a paste is done to paste computer 1 or paste computer 2 this will constitute a Remote Computer to Remote Computer RGS Sender to Sender paste because both the cut computer and the paste computer are Remote Computers If the user does a paste to paste computer 3 this will constitute a Remote Computer to Local Computer RGS Sender to Receiver paste because the paste computer is the Local C
22. Advanced Seling Oido sc dscnc serine opsacsntne este srean E a 77 Restarting the RGS Sender acnscic acate gt cteseaesieres aed tatertaseennnnsee Seseseesennbesaad tase uennen oe Raeuleamnens Pateuaninsd 78 NIC binding order numerical sequence asses epeecs aden eedeesae se cplevnecteadene nnuueeetedeasemanndeteseseaees 78 RGS p ralion mnt OOO nC tirewall sissioni oiiae nT aea E a TEAU 79 Starting the Receiver on VINO WS vesrs tease trettnes atest ss sasactgasceinn spuenat Ee I EEEa EE Tar aSa ES aa 80 Figure 5 1 Figures 8 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Receiver Control Panel RMR eee ee en ete a ear ie ont Pe TA Wa nO re Mena ON neo et eer Ee Re nO ne or 81 Remote Display Windowsni an aa e a aaa 81 Dimming of the Remote Display Window in Setup Mode ccccseeccccceesseeeceeseesseeeeeesessaeeeseeeeeaanees 83 Remote Display VV imdow selechoniGiGlog x y anaes osu ea Teter oa eae a sae erent 84 Remote Display VV indow Tool barearen elite eae aa ne tosedientoe ieee ete 85 Local Computer warning dialog if the Remote Computer is unable to blank its monitor cccceceee 86 Mesage didog oee eta et oer ted eto eR en ear eg Ce 86 Reve igiss l aie rola ile s 7el io a pee mer eens teeter ne mon Mer Rr meer tae eater ment een inert ETA ey nee aon mn eee 88 Figure 9 10 Stamalend Login ir OC OSs ashes cated e cee sn ecgeae stad eeicesierwe eee ieee aes 89 Figure Sil Easy
23. C L l P B O A R D sending formats 13 16 1 7 C received formats 13 16 1 7 T his occurs when the accepted 13 16 1 7 cut operation is selected radia o Somiaee G3 This occurs when the a paste operation is selected Paste data is received by the receiving computer and the application is notified rendering format 1 Er NOTE If the clipboard on either the Local or Remote Computer already contains content at the time the RGS connection is established a sending formats entry will appear in the log file of that computer preceding the setting filter log entry The sending formats log entry is due to the clipboard contents being sent to the Remote Computer when the RGS connection is first established Advanced capabilities 132 6 7 Receiver and Sender logging Both the RGS Receiver and the RGS Sender have the ability to log various types of information to files during their operation Receiver logging can be enabled from the Receiver Control Panel while Sender logging is controlled by a file on the RGS Sender Both types of logging are described below 6 7 1 Receiver logging The RGS Receiver logs various types of information during its operation The Receiver Control Panel Logging tab allows you to set a number of the logging parameters such as whether logging is enabled and the location name of the log file see Figure 6 32 Figure 6 32 Options available under the Logging tab ee Sey eee eee ere i Gener
24. EA 116 Figure 6 19 Enable installation of remote USB ictus uted caveaiag ied enced caveuiegS ate teed aveuictneletecsaat aura naa 116 Figure 6 20 Options available under the Network tab cccccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeneeeeeeaaeges 118 Figure 6 2 I Receiver Control Panele tiiseun aee eaten AT ATA EET ETA O 119 Figure 6 22 Receiver TIMEOUT sequence sssessesseesseserestestrssetsttstessrstesttstrsttstesserersttsttstessetsresreseesseseent 120 Figure 0 23 Ihe Hoikeys iab opion aster Sat a a ri 124 Fig re 6 24 Enable remote clipboard CneC KO Oe entecaascece ee ve rnein inin ana E eis eia iske raanei 126 Figure 6 25 Transfer of data when a cut and paste is performed from a Remote Display Window to a Local Window AEE EAE IET A A AAN nee E EIEEE EN AEA E T 127 Figure 6 26 Cut and paste computer NOMENCIGIUIE 14 2 20c555aseciveiamacd vaeeesies sail eats meses 128 Figure 6 27 Cutting and pasting between Remote and Local Computers ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeaaees 128 Figure 6 28 Receiving side filtering of cut and paste data ccccccesceseececceceeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeessaaee sees 129 Figure 6 29 Transmission of the filter string property from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender c cc eeeeeeeeees 130 Figure 6 30 Transmission of the filter string property from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender ccceeeeeeeeees 131 Figure 6 31 Remote Clipboard log entries for cut and
25. Linux also supports remote audio allowing audio generated by the application on the Remote Computer to be captured and transmitted to the Local Computer for playback presuming the Remote Computer has a physical audio device installed In addition microphone input on the Local Computer can be sent to the application running on the Remote Computer However unlike Windows microphone input on Linux can be provided only via the remote USB driver Figure 2 23 shows the RGS audio subsystem green boxes and the audio data paths for Linux these data paths are described in Table 2 2 To simplify comparison with Windows all audio components shown on the Windows diagram in Figure 2 22 are retained below but partially obscured it not supported on Linux Figure 2 23 RGS audio subsystem on Linux Linux Local Computer Path when USB pe devices are remote Remote Pa Linux Remote Computer USB driver USB 3 microphone audio device Application Application Paths RGS Audio Playback of audio Player generated by the Remote Computer application RGS Audio Recorder Table 2 2 describes each of the audio data paths The numbering and lettering in the table correspond to the numbering and lettering in Figure 2 23 For a list of audio devices supported on Linux Remote Computers see Appendix C Linux remote audio device support Table 2 2 Linux RGS audio data paths Audio Playback from the Remote Computer Sending of microphone a
26. Linux connection considerations e RGS login methods e Collaborating 5 1 Using RGS in Normal Mode Normal Mode is one of the two RGS operating modes see Section 2 11 RGS operating modes Normal Mode is the simplest means of establishing a connection you enter the IP address or hostname of the Remote Computer in the Local Computer Receiver Control Panel and click Connect j NOTE The second RGS operating mode Directory Mode is described in Chapter 7 Before attempting to connect to a particular Remote Computer for the first time HP recommends that you verify that the Remote and Local Computers satisfy the checklist in Chapter 4 Pre connection checklist The checklist in Chapter 4 can also be used as a troubleshooting aid if a connection attempt fails After verifying the pre connection checklist start the Receiver on the Local Computer This can be done from the start menu or from the command line see Figure 5 1 Figure 5 1 Starting the Receiver on Windows From start menu fay HP Remote Graphics From command line The RGS Receiver supports the following command line options for the Windows executable rgreceiver exe and the Linux executable rgreceiver sh directory file nosplash v ver version h help Rgreceiver propertyname valuel directory file Starts the Receiver in Directory Mode If the optional file path is specified the file is opened and used to look u
27. Local Computer The Remote Computer monitor will remain blank while this occurs but the monitor will exit its powersave mode and keyboard input will become unblocked until this dialog is dismissed If monitor blanking is enabled but the Remote Computer is unable to blank the display because for example the computer is not one of the supported computers listed previously a warning dialog is displayed on the Local Computer see Figure 5 7 Figure 5 7 Local Computer warning dialog if the Remote Computer is unable to blank its monitor Click on Warning Sender Monitor is Viewable to view the associated message dialog see Figure 5 8 Figure 5 8 Message dialog HP Remote Graphics Sender The Ris Sender is configured to disable the monitor keyboard and mouse that are physically attached to the Sender system when the desktop is accessed using RGS The sender was unable to successfully apply this setting Please consult the RGS User s Guide For more information on how to resolve this Failure see property documentation an monitor blanking Using RGS 86 The Remote Computer monitor blanking feature can be disabled by setting the following Sender property to O false Rgsender IsBlankScreenAndBlockInputEnabled If this property is set fo O monitor blanking will be disabled meaning that a monitor connected to the Remote Computer will display the user s desktop session Furthermore because monitor blanking is disabled the w
28. Local Computer as follows e If any rule indicates the USB connection should be denied the connection is denied regardless of any other rule e If any rule indicates the USB connection should be allowed and if there are no rules that deny the connection the connection is allowed If no rules match at all the connection is denied Therefore a deny rule takes precedence over an allow rule The ACL file is implemented as an XML Extensible Markup Language file The ACL schema file is located at C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender hprUsbAc1 xsd For backwards compatibility the following default ACL file installed during Sender installation allows all USB connections to be made C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender hprDefaultUsbAcl1 xml The names for these files can be changed using the properties described in Section 8 6 5 USB access control list properties The default ACL file contains the following contents which allows all USB connections to be made lt xml version 1 0 encoding ISO 8859 1 standalone no gt lt hprUsbAc1 gt lt ruleset gt lt rule type allow s gt lt name gt Allow all USB devices HP default lt name gt lt rule gt lt ruleset gt lt hprUsbAc1 gt The following example ACL file denies all remote USB attachment requests lt hprUsbAc1 gt lt ruleset gt lt rule type deny gt lt ruleset gt lt hprUsbAc1 gt Advanced capab
29. Properties fx Volume Sounds Audio Voice Hardware A sound cheme is a set of sounds applied to events in Windows and programs You can select an existing scheme or save one you have modified Sound scheme hl To change sounds click a program event in the following list and then select a sound to apply You can save the changes as a new sound scheme Program events windows Asterisk Close program b Citical Battery Slarm Critical Stop P Default Beep Sounds Windows XP Battery Critical way w p L Select the Critical Battery Alarm program event and press the play button the triangle located next to the Browse button The wav file associated with this event is recorded near maximum intensity If you can play this sound without distortion most sounds should play without distortion Some media applications modify their audio signal prior to sending it to the audio device The Windows Media Player may appear to distort some audio files This is due to signal modification by some type of enhancement such as an equalizer 6 2 3 Disabling audio on the Sender Most audio devices will allow the Sender speakers if present to be disabled while still allowing audio to be sent to the Receiver This is done by enabling the mute for the master volume control through the Sounds and Audio Devices control panel or through the Volume icon in the taskbar The Volume icon in the taskbar will change when mute is enabled Ena
30. RGS 5 2 0 audio access method allows audio parameters to be set by audio controls on the Remote Computer alone The pre RGS 5 2 0 audio access method requires setting audio parameters on both the Remote Computer and Local Computer RGS overview 40 2 17 4 Computers and operating systems which support RGS audio Figure 2 24 shows the computers and operating systems that support RGS audio For further details on Remote Audio see Section 6 2 Remote audio operation Figure 2 24 Configurations that support remote audio Receiver Audio Windows Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Business Embedded RHEL V4 update 5 or later V5 Support Matrix XPe WES SP1 SP2 SP3 32 BIT X64 ree and Enterprise 32 bit Linux update 2 or later 32 bit 64 bit it Desktops Personal Workstations HP xw and z series Mobile Workstations Desktop PCs Notebook PCs Performance Thin Clients HP G17725 HP GI7720 HP GI7720w HP dc 3 Blade WS Client HP dc 2 Blade WS Client Mobile Thin Clients may not be suitable tor 720p and higher multi media content HP 441 Ot ES HP 6720t XPe HP 2533t XPe Flexible and Mainstream Thin Clients may not be suitable tor 20p and higher multi media content HP t5 30w WES HP t5630w WES HP t5730 XPe HP t5630 XPe HP t5720 XPe HP t5545 HP ThinPro GI HP Blade WS Client HP Blade WS Client HP ThinPro Sender Audio Support Windows XP Professional SP1 SP2 Windows Vista Business Ultimate and RHEL V4 update 5
31. Receiver and Sender dialog timeouts should support most authorization and authentication scenarios For more complex scenarios requiring additional time the user should adjust both the Receiver and Sender dialog timeouts appropriately Advanced capabilities 123 6 5 Hotkeys Hotkeys are key sequences that cause special action to be taken by the Receiver Such key sequences are processed by the Receiver and are not sent to the Remote Computer However a hotkey sequence may initiate some type of interaction with the Remote Computer The Receiver Control Panel provides a number of options under the Hotkeys tab see Figure 6 23 Figure 6 23 The Hotkeys tab options ee sy p E Sr or Se a Y we gF a gl er iii 7 oi E dia General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Clipboard Logging gt Send CTRL ALT END key sequence as CTRL ALT DEL LJ Send First Key C Key Repeat Setup Mode Hotkey iit boven Space Down Space Up aa tot iE ee Set Reset Note While in Setup Mode press the H key to display the toolbar the M key to display the control panel the N key to minimize the remote display and the C key to close the remote display The options available under the Hotkeys tab are Send CTRL ALT END key sequence as CTRL ALT DEL On some computers the operating system will intercept the CTRL ALT DELETE key sequence and will not forward it to the Receiver For example assume that the Local Computer is running Window
32. Receiver to the Sender 4 1 Local Computer Receiver checklist Verify the following items on the Receiver computer before attempting to establish a connection 1 Verify the hostname or IP address of the Remote Computer Verify that you have the correct hostname or IP address of the Remote Computer If the Remote Computer hostname fails to resolve to the correct IP address address this problem before continuing 2 Verify that from the Local Computer you can ping the Remote Computer If you re unable to ping the Remote Computer you won t be able to establish an RGS connection Ping the Remote Computer using the same computer designator you ll be using to establish an RGS connection either the hostname or the IP address of the Remote Computer Open a Command window and execute either ping hostname or ping lt IP address gt If no ping reply is received the Sender computer is unreachable or is not running resolve this problem before continuing If a ping reply is received the Sender computer is reachable by RGS Ej NOTE Ensure that firewall settings are not preventing the ping command from working 4 2 Remote Computer Sender checklist Modification and verification of the Sender state can be performed either by connecting a keyboard mouse and monitor directly to the Remote Computer or by using Remote Desktop Protocol to log in remotely to the Remote Computer In either case verify each of the following items e OPTI
33. Remote Computer This tool is available at www stereopsis com blttest 11 4 Contiguring your network for optimal pertormance RGS depends on low network latency and reasonably high network bandwidth There are several methods to test and measure the network bandwidth latency and the number of hops between Sender and Receiver computers e Use the ping command to measure network latency From a command prompt on Windows or a terminal window on Linux execute ping hostname This will report the network latency Be sure the ping protocol ICMP is not blocked by a firewall Windows may be set up with IPSec filters be sure there is no IPSec filter policy disabling ICMP traffic e Use Traceroute Linux or tracert Windows to measure the network latency between two computers Traceroute will report the number of hops it takes to reach a computer in addition to the network latency e Use ttep to measure the network bandwidth ttep is available at www pcausa com Utilities pcattcp htm Once you ve characterized your network performance you can decide if improvement is required Several possible steps are described below The computer NIC will auto negotiate the network speed with the network switches on the local network The negotiated speed can vary from 10 Mb sec half duplex to 10 Gb sec full duplex Most modern NICs and switches will negotiate the highest possible speed available However unless the network has been carefully designed for
34. Sender cannot be started manually Proper configuration and startup of the Sender can be verified by examining the X server log file Xorg 0 log The log file will show that the extension is loaded and that the extension has started the Sender Log file content should be like II LoadModule rge II Loading usr lib64 xorg modules extensions librge so RG 10 29 52 654 HP Remote Graphics extension Build date Jul 15 2009 RG 10 29 53 002 Listening for RG connections at var opt hpremote rgsender sockets rgsender rge 0 RG 10 29 53 631 Started rgsender process PID 5780 END of log file example The rgsender sh command has two options that can be executed from the command line The rgsender sh command does not start the Sender if either of these options are used The functionality of each option is as follows v ver version Displays the Sender version information h help Displays the rgsender sh command line options that are listed on this page Uninstalling the Sender on Linux To uninstall the RGS Sender on Linux perform the following steps 1 Log in as root 2 Ifthe default install sh was used then the following command should report some variation of the following packages rpm qa grep i rgsender rgsender linux 64 5 1 0 1 rgsender config 64 5 1 0 1 3 To remove the rgsender package and corresponding configuration rom if used execute the command rpm e allmatches rgsender
35. Sender will remove it when all non primary connections terminate Using RGS 95 6 Advanced capabilities This chapter discusses the many advanced capabilities of RGS Click on the Advanced gt gt gt button in the Receiver Control Panel to display the tabs shown in Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Tabs to access advanced RGS capabilities HP Remote Graphics Receiver Hostname Sel 15 2 76 29 a About setup Mode Advan ced gt gt General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Clipboard Loggir L Promgtftor username and password Enable global image updates Match receiver display resolution Match receiver display layout select help browser WINDOS hh exe P The capabilities available under each of these tabs will be described in detail Unless required for clarity the portion of the Receiver Control Panel above the tabs will not be shown Advanced capobilities 96 6 1 General options The options available under the General tab are shown in Figure 6 2 Figure 6 2 General tab options P Bies m m E ee non a a E ees ee PRs dial General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Clipboard Loggir Promptfor username and password L Enable global image updates Match recerver display resolution Match recerver display layout select help browser WwviINDOVyS hh exe a aes da The options available under the General tab are Prompt for username and password In certain scenarios su
36. The agent header file RGSenderEvents h is installed with the RGS Sender and is located at C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender include RGSenderEvents h Hinclude lt windows h gt Hinclude lt stdio h gt include RGSenderEvents h define BUFFER SIZE 1024 safe EVENTLOGRECORD size for now define EVENT SERVER NULL remote server nodename local NULL define EVENT SRC rgsender specifies specific event name source in HPRemote BOOL processEvent LPCTSTR eventServer LPCTSTR eventSource DWORD dwEventNum HANDLE h EVENTLOGRECORD pevlr BYTE bBuffer BUFFER SIZE DWORD dwRead dwNeeded BOOL result i7 Open ead close event log __ ____ _ _ if h OpenEventLog eventServer eventSource NULL report error status return true Remote Application Termination 170 Set the pointer to our buffer Strings and data will get appended to the EVENTLOGRECORD structure pevlr EVENTLOGRECORD amp bBuffer Read the event specified by dwEventNum result ReadEventLog h event log handle EVENTLOG SEEK READ start at specific event EVENTLOG FORWARDS READ advance forward dwEventNum record to read pevlr pointer to buffer BUFFER SIZE size of buffer amp dwRead number of bytes read amp dwNeeded bytes in next record if CloseEventLog h false report error status return true Process event
37. Windows the following command line option for Rgsender exe is described 1 logSetupFile Specifies the logSetupFile file used to describe various logging parameters for Sender error and informational output This file is used to determine where the output goes to a file or to standard error as well as the type of output logged INFO or DEBUG At installation the Sender default is with 1 logSetup turned on where the logSetup file in the installation directory is set for output to a file named rg 1log at INFO debug level Unless this command line option is used to change the logSetupFile file the default logSetup file in the Sender installation folder c Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender is used The first few lines of logSetup are shown in Figure 6 33 Figure 6 33 logSetup file lopSetup Notepad JRA Configuration Pick one JARRE Pet Log only to STDOUT at logdcolus rootLoqgger INFOo STDOUT i maa cog only to rg log Tile log4colus rootLogger INFa FILE Log to STDOUT and rg log tile Ft logdcolus roaotLogger INFo STDOUT FILE OE ee ee n ia ee ae n as The highlighted uncommented line specifies that INFO level logging is used and that logging will occur only to the rg log file no STDOUT logging If another logging level is required edit the file to replace INFO with any of the following DEBUG WARN ERROR or FATAL If STDOUT logging is required or if bo
38. Windows Sounds and Audio Devices Properties dialog allows the user to select the sound recording device For simplicity microphone is used below instead of sound recording device Remote microphone is not supported on Microsoft Windows Vista Prior to RGS 5 2 0 a Receiver attached USB microphone couldn t be remotely connected to the Sender in the same manner as other remote USB devices see Section 2 16 Remote USB overview Audio from a Receiver attached USB microphone would need to be first processed by the Windows USB audio driver on the Receiver The audio would then be sent to the RGS Audio Recorder see Figure 2 22 for capture and transmission to the Sender In order for a USB microphone to be used in this manner USB devices are Local must be selected in the Remote USB Configuration dialog during installation This ensures the USB microphone is a local device allowing its audio to be captured by the RGS Audio Recorder This capability allows use of any USB microphone supported by Windows At RGS 5 2 0 the Remote USB driver on the Local Computer has been enhanced to support the USB isochronous data type which is commonly used for streaming data such as that generated by audio and video devices This enables certain isochronous USB microphones to be accessed directly by the Remote Computer in the same manner as other USB devices See Appendix B for a list of supported USB microphones listed under Sound recording d
39. a manner to better preserve their visual quality but at the possible expense of higher network bandwidth and or lower image update rates The default value is 1 image quality will be improved This property affects the setting of the Boost checkbox as described in Section 5 1 3 Remote Display Window Toolbar RGS properties 155 8 5 13 Windows placement and size properties As described previously these properties are per session per connection properties If for example the Receiver connects to two Remote Computers these properties can be used to specify the properties of each of the two Remote Display Windows on the Local Computer These properties contain the parameter lt N gt which ranges from O to N 1 for the creation of N sessions connections For example for the first session the X position of the Remote Display Window is specified by the property Rgreceiver Session 0 RemoteDisplayWindow Xx Note that these properties do not take affect until a connection is actually established to a Remote Computer Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow X int 0 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow X IsMutable bool 1 This property specifies the X position of the session N Remote Display Window as measured from the left side of the Local Computer display Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow Y int 0 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow Y IsMutable bool 1 This property speci
40. and higher releases support auto remote and auto return of user specified USB devices when using Windows on both the sender and receiver platforms Auto remote allows specified USB devices to be automatically attached to a remote sender session at RGS connection and then returned to the local client at RGS disconnect For information on how to modity the Registry to support auto remoting see Auto remoting of USB devices RGS overview 32 Figure 2 19 USB device accessibility for the setting USB devices are Local Remote USB devices are Local Remote Device 3 will be remotely accessible These devices will only be locally because it was plugged in during an accessible never remotely because RGS connection This device will be they were plugged in while no RGS remotely accessible during the current connection was established RGS connection and any subsequent RGS connections USB device 1 USB device 2 USB device 3 plugged in plugged in plugged in power on RGS connection established Device 3 will not be accessible either locally or remotely during breaks in the RGS connection As can be seen in Figure 2 19 USB device accessibility depends on when the USB device is plugged into the Local Computer It a USB device is inserted while no RGS connection is established the device will be locally accessible only If a USB device is inserted while an RGS connection is established the device will be remotely accessi
41. and the other two non primary users A small button with an X is displayed next to all non primary usernames Pressing this button disconnects the corresponding non primary user Using RGS 94 All non primary users can be disconnected using the Sender GUI Figure 5 19 shows the Windows Sender GUI selection that can be used to disconnect non primary users Figure 5 19 Windows Sender GUI to disconnect non primary users ere Fee Remote Keyboard Mouse Mon Primary Users All Users About Prior to RGS 5 2 0 the collaboration notification dialog could not be hidden although it could be moved elsewhere on the desktop by clicking in the dialog and dragging it Beginning at RGS 5 2 0 a new Sender property has been added the Rgsender IsCollaborationNotificationEnabled property see Section 8 6 2 Sender general properties This property allows the user to enable or disable display of the collaboration notification dialog CAUTION Caution is advised in disabling the collaboration notification dialog because neither the Remote User if present nor the Local Users will be notified who is participating in a collaboration session Furthermore if display of the collaboration notification dialog is disabled the warning dialog in Figure 5 7 which is displayed when the Remote Computer is unable to blank its monitor will also be prevented from being displayed If the collaboration notification dialog is being displayed the
42. are Remote and USB devices are Local Remote In both cases smartcard readers will be locally accessible prior to establishing an RGS connection and will be remotely accessible once an RGS connection is established RGS overview 33 Figure 2 20 Smartcard reader accessibility pre and postRGS connection for settings USB devices are Remote or USB devices are Local Remote USB devices are Remote or Smartcard reader will USB devices are Local Remote be locally accessible a smartcard reader smartcard Smartcard reader will automatically plugged in plugged in become remotely accessible smartcard reader Smartcard reader will be plugged in remotely accessible i d RGS connection RGS connection power on RGS connection t established Smartcard reader will be locally accessible during breaks in the RGS connection Figure 2 20 indicates that the USB devices are Remote and USB devices are Local Remote settings are effectively ignored for smartcard readers In particular the USB devices are Remote setting is ignored as evidenced by the smartcard reader being locally accessible prior to establishment of an RGS connection Similarly the USB devices are Local Remote setting is ignored as evidenced by the locally accessible smartcard reader automatically becoming remotely accessible once an RGS connection is established e Ifa smartcard reader is plugged in after an RGS connection is established it will be available remotely
43. cannot be split between multiple Remote Computers nor can they be collectively attached to multiple Remote Computers Figure 2 17 The local USB devices can be attached to only one Remote Computer at a time Remote Computer 2 Keyboard amp mouse Remote always connected ane ee to Local Computer Computer 1 2 16 1 USB session switching At RGS 5 1 3 the ability to dynamically move USB devices from one Remote Computer to another was added Prior to RGS 5 1 3 it was necessary to first disconnect all RGS connections sessions to the Remote Computers and then re establish connections while specifying a new Remote Computer to attach the USB devices to With RGS 5 1 3 USB devices can be detached from one Remote Computer and made accessible by another Remote Computer without first needing to disconnect the RGS connections For details on this see Section 6 3 Remote USB operation 2 16 2 lsochronous USB support At RGS 5 2 0 support was added for the USB isochronous data type which is commonly used for streaming data devices such as audio and video devices See Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS for a list of supported isochronous USB devices See also Section 2 17 3 Support of sound recording devices on Windows for an overview of the two ways USB microphones can now be used with RGS RGS overview 31 2 16 3 Install time configuration of remote USB E This section provides an overview of install time con
44. ea A E E A 136 7 1 2 Starting the Receiver in Directory Mode as sccbsscaeitiorssead liso somecnesicncesusavectueesebeeyiecciibaeeeoietuad 137 7 1 3 Selecting Remote Display Windows while in Directory MOde cccccceseececeeseeeeeesseeseeeesaeeees 138 RGS properties C TNS a cicesse preset ens eect ste ie oe ones E E E E esta teen heme space O e OS 139 8 2 Setting property values in a configuration file cccccccccceeeeecccceee ee eeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeesanees 139 8 3 Setting properties on the commond line egctercurnccsesanctsayyitinesaesacdlabdowdiecdsveccodiasunndersuhadtdivesnduaasestedds 140 oA PUNE AMGCION propero eae e E E E NA 140 Ge ROS Reever DIODES eeds RT E E T 141 8 5 1 Receiver propery Mer rare hy er pastorate ari se cee A E E S 141 8 5 2 Receiver DIODETY groups secivindececowcanwwexwadnaud tecmanaisacoacanstenwane ronusananiawananaiuaesonenaenedaewvetwaannaes 142 8 5 3 Receiver general PDrOperES eee eters Mae nee eer eee ane ve eer ae ene en eee 145 8 5 4 Receiver browser properties een ene eee ene ae 150 8 5 5 RECS IVS UO TOO MS Sears cps aces die eats E ns eecetsesaseat a eacebesseceseee 151 8 5 6 Receiver microphone property eee ame ee ene ae a ane ee ce ene 151 8 5 7 Receiver WSB Properties scrire ineen A E E elatanwanateerahiatuceenimenten 151 8 5 8 Receiver aol i e144 properes ocenienie or n ee ne aes ere 152 8 5 9 kacer TOK y 2 021g c een ne ee ee E eee ee ere 152 8 5 10 Receiver Remote Clipboard
45. example print out event if result We only know how to process specific events if pevlr gt EventID RGSENDER CONNECT STATE Retrieve the two UINT32 fields of this message representing primary and non primary connections unsigned int pData unsigned int LPBYTE pevlr pevlr gt DataOffset Examine state of primary connections here for other agent response if number drops to zero example only prints out retrieved record to console printf Event u Primary u Secondary su n dwEventNum pData 0 pData 1 Process other events here if desired else report unrecognized event here return true return false j void monitorEvents LPCTSTR eventServer LPCTSTR eventSource int seconds DWORD dwCurrentIndex 0 DWORD dwCurrentStart DWORD dwCurrentCount DWORD dwNewlIndex int waitedFor This function will monitor the log for the specified number of seconds If seconds is less than zero we will wait forever for waitedFor 0 seconds lt 0 waitedFor lt seconds HANDLE h i Openi read status of bog Close event LOQ S S s gt s SS if h OpenEventLog eventServer eventSource NULL report error status here return Remote Application Termination 171 ei Fy Ki La aie Compute the index of the last event If the count is zero If an event is added either the start or count will change
46. group e Rgreceiver Network Timeout IsMutable e Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning e Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error e Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog Hotkey properties group e Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsMutable e Rgreceiver Hotkeys SetupModeSequence e Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsSendCtrlAltEndAsCtrlAltDeleteEnabled e Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsSendFirstKeyInSequenceEnabled e Rgreceiver Hotkeys IskeyRepeatEnabled e Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsCtrlAltDeletePassThroughEnabled RGS properties 142 Ky g e Remote Clipboard properties group see below for the per session Remote Clipboard property e Rgreceiver Clipboard IsMutable e Rgreceiver Clipboard IsEnabled e Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString e Logging properties group e Rgreceiver Log IsMutable e Rgreceiver Log IsFileLoggerEnabled e Rgreceiver Log IsConsoleLoggerEnabled e Rgreceiver Log Filename e Rgreceiver Log Level e Rgreceiver Log MaxFileSize e Rgreceiver Log NumBackupFiles e Image codec properties group e Rgreceiver ImageCodec IsMutable e Rgreceiver ImageCodec Quality e Rgreceiver ImageCodec IsBoostEnabled e Per session properties e Remote Clipboard per session property see above for the per Receiver Remote Clipboard properties e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt Clipboard IsEnabled e Window placement and size group e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow xX e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow Y e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt Virtu
47. is issued to the local user Match receiver display layout This checkbox is new with RGS 5 1 3 When checked the Receiver Local Computer will try to set the layout of the Remote Computer physical displays to have the same display layout and resolution as the Receiver displays If the Sender is unable to match the layout and resolution of the Receiver physical displays the Sender will try to just match the Receiver display resolution For example it the Receiver has two physical displays in a 1x2 layout and a overall virtual display resolution of 2560x1024 1280x1024x2 the Receiver will try to set the Sender to the same layout and resolution If that fails the Receiver will try to set a single Sender physical display resolution of 2560x1024 If that fails an error is reported to the local user For information on the properties associated with the above two checkboxes see Section 8 5 3 Receiver general properties specitically see the Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled and Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverPhysicalDisplaysEnabled properties Select help browser Enables the user to specify a web browser such as mozilla to display online help This option is not available on Windows grayed out because the default web browser is automatically read from the Windows Registry Advanced capabilities 97 6 2 Remote audio operation For an overview of remote audio see Section 2 17 Remote audio overview Before describin
48. list is now integrated into this document as Appendix B Appendix C Linux remote audio device support This appendix provides information on audio devices that are supported on Linux based Remote Computers EY IMPORTANT e Fora version of the HP RGS 5 3 0 User Guide that may be more current than this document visit the HP website www hp com support rgs_manuals e For release specific information refer to the release notes provided with the RGS product e For additional RGS product information visit the RGS homepage at www hp com go rgs 1 1 Typical RGS contiguration Figure 1 1 shows a typical RGS configuration consisting of a blade workstation and a thin client The user s applications run on the blade workstation while the user interacts with these applications from the thin client Figure 1 1 Typical RGS configuration for Remote while the Greek gamma symbol stands for Graphics K This symbol denotes the HP RGS 5 product The stylistic R stands User applications run on the blade workstation under Windows XP i A Ei TCP IP network interactive desktop image keyboard amp mouse inputs HP ProLiant xw460c Blade Workstation HP Compaq t9720 Thin Client The blade workstation desktop image is transmitted over the network to the thin client which displays the desktop image locally in a window RGS is designed to provide fast capture compression and transmission of the desktop ima
49. locked or is primary user disconnected but still logged in has local user logged in 9 local user can unlock local user N is now the primary user In both cases the local user becomes the new primary user and the prior primary a User is disconnected has another user logged in Remote Display Window Remote Display Window is terminated when another user logs in local user will need to reconnect RGS connection established This is the collaboration path multiple local users can connect to the primary user s desktop subject to authorization by the primary user primary user authorize connection _HP Remote Graphics Receiver EJ HP Remote Graphics Receiver lt p Authentication Failed N Eg Possible reasons include the Following 1 The authentication credentials that you entered such as domain name user name and password are not valid or recognized by the Sender system 2 The Sender s authentication is not configured appropriately Please consult the User s manual and README txt For the latest directions and issues with respect to configuring authentication Is desktop locked or is primary user disconnected but still logged in HP Remote Graphics Sender Do you manit PEKON radem Ss Cech Bo wider dekip m Live jf Remote This di
50. logged to the Receiver installation log file Usage Setup exe autoinstall agreetolicense folder lt folder gt usb local usb remote usb localRemote clipboard noreboot removesettings Setup exe autoremove noreboot Setup exe viewlicense Setup exe help Command line options autoinstall This option performs one of the following e Installs the Receiver if it s not already installed e Updates the Receiver if a prior version of the Receiver is already installed e Repairs the Receiver if the version being installed is the same as the version that is already installed The Receiver will not be reinstalled if the version of the Receiver being installed is older than the version of the Receiver already installed agreetolicense Use of this option indicates that the user agrees to the license for use of this software This option is required when doing an install autoremove Remove the Receiver folder lt folder gt Specifies the destination folder default is C Program Files HewlettPackard Remote Graphics Receiver usb local Install USB in Local Mode usb remote Install USB in Remote Mode The system will automatically restart after the install completes usb localRemote Install USB in Local Remote Mode The system will automatically restart after the install completes This is the default if none of usb local usb remote and usb localRemote are specified j clipboard Enable remote clipboard
51. low 0 medium 1 or high 2 quality This property is used to adjust the sample rate of the streaming audio Less information is sent over the network if the sample rate is lower and therefore the less network bandwidth that is consumed The default value is 1 medium audio quality Rgreceiver Audio IsFollowsFocusEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver Audio IsFollowsFocusEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 enables only the audio stream associated with the Remote Display Window that currently has the keyboard focus The audio stream from all other active connections is disabled Setting the property to O combines the audio from all active connections into a single stream The default value is O combine audio from all active connections and play in a single stream Rgreceiver Audio IsInStereo bool 1 Rgreceiver Audio IsInStereo IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 stereo is enabled and both the left and right channels are transmitted The highest quality audio 2 with stereo enabled is equivalent to CD quality audio but consumes more network bandwidth The default value is 1 stereo is enabled 8 5 6 Receiver microphone property Rgreceiver Mic IsEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver Mic IsEnabled IsMutable bool 1 This property is new with the RGS 5 1 3 release If set to 1 remote microphone is enabled on unmuted The default value is O remote microphone is disabled off muted 8 5 7 Receiver USB properties Rgreceiver Usb IsMutable bo
52. maximum throughput the NICs and switches may auto negotiate to a sub optimal speed If the NIC and switches are configured to auto negotiate properly you can leave the settings to auto negotiate If you want to force the network to operate at a particular speed the settings in the NIC and switches can be hard coded You must be careful with these settings however If the NIC and switch settings don t complement each other the network will have poor performance e Configuring the NIC on Windows You can change the link speed and duplex mode on Windows by opening the Device Manager Click Control Panel gt System gt Hardware Tab gt Device Manager Once the Device Manager is open click the next to Network adapters Then right click on the network adapter that you want to change and select Properties Click the Advanced tab Each network adapter has its own properties settings that can be changed The property that affects the link speed and duplex is usually named Link Speed amp Duplex Click that property If you want auto negotiation select the Auto Detect entry in the Value box If you want to hard code the speed and duplex always choose the fastest link your network can support and always choose full duplex e Configuring the NIC on Linux On Linux systems the ethtool tool can be used to configure networking Perform the following steps to obtain and set the network characteristics on Linux To obtain the LAN characteristics for in
53. must be running Windows e Single Sign on must be enabled on the Remote Computer e No other RGS connection can exist attempt to log in using Single Sign on another user already connected to the Remote Computer or already logged into it attempt to log in using Standard Login Authenticate to 10 10 42 65 Enter domain usemame and password if authenticating against a computer in a domain Enter hostname username if authenticating against a computer in a workgroup User name 1 0 10 62 65 Administrator Password O HP Remote Graphics Receiver DD Authentication failed Possible reasons include the following 1 The password that you entered has expired 2 The authentication credentials that you entered such as domain authentication name user name and password are not valid or recognized by the Sender system succeeded 3 The Sender s authentication is not configured appropriately Please consult the User s manual and README txt For the latest directions and issues with respect to configuring authentication Windows desktop if authentication successful Using RGS 91 5 4 Changing your password In RGS 5 0 and earlier attempting to make a connection with an expired password would generate an Authentication failed error message In this situation the user would either need direct access to the Remote Computer to change the password or would need to call IT to have
54. newer Note that unlike the other ESX 3 0 2 versions of VMware ESX this version of VMware ESX requires RGS 5 2 or newer ESX 3 0 2 Update RGS 5 1 or newer ESX 3 0 3 RGS 5 1 or newer See Note 1 ESX 3 5 RGS 5 1 or newer ESX 3 5 Updatel 2 3 and 4 RGS 5 1 or newer ESX 4 RGS 5 1 or newer Note 1 During installation of Windows XP Professional on this version of VMware ESX the USB driver file usbd sys will not be installed In order for RGS Remote USB to work you ll need to install a usbd sys file that is compatible with your particular version of Windows XP Professional either Windows XP Professional SP2 or Windows XP Professional SP3 The required usbd sys file can be found on your Windows XP Professional installation media and should be installed in the windows system32 drivers folder Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 183 Table A 2 shows the VMware View versions that support RGS Only VMware View 3 1 and newer versions support RGS and only with RGS 5 2 5 and newer versions as shown in the green cell Table A 2 VMware View versions that support RGS RGS 5 2 4 and older RGS 5 2 5 and newer VMware View 3 0 and older VMware View 3 0 and older versions do not support any versions of RGS RGS 5 2 4 and older versions VMware View 3 1 and newer versions support VMware View 3 1 and newer are not supported by VMware RGS 5 2 5 and newer versions on Windows XP View 3 1 and newer versions Professional SP2 and SP3 VM
55. on the Local Computer e Sender dialog timeout property This property specifies the maximum time that a message originating from the Receiver will be displayed on the Remote Computer It also specifies how long the Remote Computer Sender will wait for a dialog response from the Receiver For example assume that a local user is attempting to connect to a Remote Computer Assume furthermore that another user is already logged into the Remote Computer this person is therefore the primary user The Sender will prompt the primary user for authorization to connect the local user to the Remote Computer The duration of this prompt is set by the Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog property The Receiver property Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog limits how long the Receiver will wait for a response from the Remote Computer before returning failure If the Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog timeout expires without action by the primary user the Sender dialog exits and connection is denied by default If the Sender times out the Receiver will also time out based on its Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog property because no authorization reply will be returned by the Sender In the previous example the dialog was displayed on the Remote Computer An example of a dialog being displayed on the Local Computer follows When a Receiver connects to a Sender running Linux the Pluggable Authentication Module PAM on the Sender attempts to authenticate the c
56. options you would like to enable in the Remote Graphics Sender Do you wish to enable Remote Clipboard Mi Enable Remote USB O es IE Enable Remote Microphone No J Enable Remote Clipboard l m not sure want more information ua IE l m not sure want more information e InstallShield lt Back M n M cancel fnstallSiidld lt Back Mf nen M L cancel For details on using Remote Clipboard see Section 6 6 Remote Clipboard operation Following installation Remote Clipboard on Windows can be enabled or disabled via a toggle in the Receiver s controls RGS overview 43 2 19 Interoperability of RGS and Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection This section discusses interoperability considerations for RGS and Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection RDC Because RGS and RDC both provide connection to a remote desktop their interoperation is important to understand If a local user is connected to a Remote Computer using RDC and then attempts to establish an RGS connection the RGS connection only works if the local user credentials match for both connections This implies that the same user wants access to transition from RDC to an RGS connection If the credentials match the current RDC session disconnects and the RGS Receiver takes control of the Remote Computer Windows desktop session The current user does not log off and work continues with the new connection The reverse works as well If a user is connected with R
57. place for their safety For example users must know how much time they have to reconnect before safeguards take action If a remote agent arms itself for application termination users should be presented with a large unmistakable disarming opt out panel that upon login and discovery they can halt any agent actions before termination Organizations should carefully discuss and publicize safety measures due to potential data loss Issue Users should not be able to disable or specity their own timeouts due to potential irreversible data loss General agent design guidelines In developing an agent HP recommends following these guidelines The agent should externally log its decisions and actions for postmortem analysis Independent agents should provide their own opt out disarming dialogs with countdown feedback before taking action Expect the unexpected where possible limit your actions to those areas you are certain of the outcomes to minimize loss of data and productivity Always inspect error codes when reading event logs the reliability of this RGS communication method depends upon the Windows Event Log system While we have yet to see a failure in this path we recommend using all information available to its fullest potential 10 5 Additional sateguard features for Windows systems The following optional procedures for the RGS Sender service can improve the reliability of your remote agent solution RGS Sender Servic
58. properties sciicc scesdeeecivincesycavdencdevevesswaeedeuede chews lesadesaecteriuesi eses 153 8 5 1 evecihy slag 919 0 ale Propere seen ee ee ree en eee ee eee 154 8 5 12 Receiver image codec Ome ies hei acsecies teat ecasnsacte ese teewectececos suck ceuoescenceais secon sncececessecten 155 8 5 13 Windows placement and size DIODSTNSS isc cis ereenctcecevecenenbcceuedlesyace can Voces essecdeceiveccwrs ei sesdexs 156 Oa RO Y 1 fe 12198 9 0 0 14 r ne eer eee ee ee eee ere eee ree ren ene ee oe 157 8 6 ATTOR COU OS a E E A coeno en E E E S 157 8 6 2 oender onra pron T er E A eee EAEI 158 8 6 3 DENCE microphone PODE osrin E ER A E E E ses 160 8 6 4 Sender network timeout PrODSINeSs 195 54 cnentancraneesdaeacesmasaradateareaenioyaanasesseaeetosaaennndete 161 8 6 5 Sender USB access control list properties stores cosassacesusasandaroncanenios tate tedactncnmtdcneaeaeeennerenaans 161 8 6 6 Sender NIC binding Properes ee ee nee eee nee ee re nen E Eai 161 8 6 7 DEMS le epoca FNC SY serieren R E E NS 162 Sender event logging on Windows A MS IP Re moie Oe E EA EO N E E EE N 163 9 2 Usages of the HPRemote IOC sacs eden sss zeapscasecdasatvnessiacietosseacateecae weataieotesenaesnosiaeanenseaedsuasseaneeas 165 9 3 Additional information on event logging cccccecccccecenesceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeeeceessauneeseesseaaaeses 166 Remote Application Termination 10 1 ROGS COMME CIION ana user SIC 5 tcc cet scape seta ntaetc eni ier AEn Nri
59. property is a keep filter not a reject filter The string is a regular expression and is used by the receiving computer to specify the clipboard formats that it will accept The rgreceiverconfig file contains the following commented out entry for this property which indicates the default clipboard formats supported by RGS Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString 1 2 7 8 13 16 17 Ole Private Data Object Descriptor Link Source Descriptor HTML Format Rich Text Format XML Spreadsheet The default clipboard formats are e 1 CF TEXT Text format Each line ends with a carriage return linefeed CR LF combination A null character signals the end of the data Use this format for ANSI text e 2 CF BITMAP Bitmap format e 7 CF_OEMTEXT Text format containing characters in the OEM character set Each line ends with a carriage return linefeed CR LF combination A null character signals the end of the data e 8 CF DIB A memory object containing a BITMAPINFO structure followed by the bitmap bits e 13 CF _UNICODETEXT Unicode text format Each line ends with a carriage return linefeed CR LF combination A null character signals the end of the data Advanced capabilities 129 e 16 CF LOCALE Locale identifier associated with text in the clipboard e 17 DIBV5 Bitmap color space and bitmap data e Ole Private Data A private application format understood only by the application offering the format e Object Descript
60. provided the appropriate XF86Config xorg conf file was correctly modified Installing RGS 71 b The Linux Sender uses the Pluggable Authentication Module PAM for authentication If you are using the GNOME Desktop Manager or KDE Desktop Manager add the following line to the files listed below session optional pam _rg so Files and all related derivatives etc pam d gdm etc pam d kdm etc pam d xdm c Some Linux distribution versions utilize newer or older PAM support modules and support conventions The rgsender_contig_64 rom performs configuration analysis to determine types of pam_unix so pam_env so common auth and pam_stack so may apply to your configuration for the etc pam d rgsender configuration file If you choose to do all of your own customizations manually please run the rgsender_config_64 rpm at least once on a test system to determine an example of any customizations that you might need in your current environment If another desktop manager such as Enlightenment is being used you will need to make similar changes to the PAM configuration file used by it Consult your Linux and Desktop Manager documentation for further information If the PAM system has been configured to use custom PAM authentication modules then you may need to manually configure the PAM module that is used by the RGS Sender You should consult your Linux documentation when configuring PAM If you are using a custom PAM authentication modul
61. session running without supervision To prevent applications from running unattended a customer designed agent can use the HPRemote log to monitor the status of connections to determine if application termination is required If so the agent would be designed to take the appropriate action to terminate the application Chapter 10 Remote Application Termination describes how to create an agent that uses the HPRemote log to automatically monitor the connection between the Remote and Local Computers and then take whatever action you require Sample code is provided to facilitate creation of the agent e Other automated actions The basic principle behind using the HPRemote log to perform automatic Remote Application Termination can be used to create an agent to automatically monitor and process any of the events logged by the RGS Sender Chapter 10 lists the events logged by the RGS Sender and describes their format Using the sample code provided you can create an agent to automatically monitor and process any Sender events Sender event logging on Windows 165 9 3 Additional information on event logging For additional information on Windows event logging search Microsoft Developer Network MSDN as shown in Figure 9 4 Clicking on the first search result will typically display the page shown Figure 9 4 MSDN event logging information Search criteria Page typically displayed by the first search result OBOBOO Biotogogo
62. the Sender has exited 2 6 Application support Except as noted in the next paragraph RGS provides application transparency meaning that the Local Computer user in executing applications on the Remote Computer is typically unaware that the application is executing remotely RGS supports all applications except gaming applications and those applications that use full screen exclusive mode If a full screen MS DOS command prompt window is created on the Sender using for example command com the window will be reset to its default size by RGS Likewise if a full screen Windows command prompt window is created using cmd exe or the command prompt icon the window will also be reset to its default size by RGS Full screen DirectDraw applications are not supported however DirectDraw applications in a Window may work and should be qualified individually On Remote Computers running Linux OpenGLbased applications can only be remoted if the Remote Computer is using NVIDIA graphics 2 7 Networking support RGS uses TCP IP over a standard computer network and supports Ethernet connection speeds of 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit The RGS Sender listens on TCP IP port 42966 The port used by the RGS Receiver is assigned by the Local Computer OS and can vary HP recommends full duplex operation between the Sender and Receiver For information on using RGS through a firewall see Section 4 4 Using RGS through a firewal NOTE
63. the remote computer Excel clipboard data that contains links will attempt to access websites referenced by the links If the remote computer is not connected to the Internet Excel may hang trying to access the websites To provide the ability to handle such problems Remote Clipboard implements user settable filtering to allow control of which clipboard formats can be used in cut and paste operations Filtering of clipboard formats is performed on the computer receiving the cut and paste data See Figure 6 28 which expands on Figure 6 26 to show receiving side filtering Figure 6 28 Receiving side filtering of cut and paste data sending computer receiving computer cut computer paste computer remote computer application local computer application remote computer local computer UWrowv roa C L I P B O A R D The filter parameter is specified by this RGS Receiver Remote Clipboard property Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString i IMPORTANT This property is for advanced users only The property string should be changed from its default value only if Remote Clipboard doesn t support the clipboard format required by your application For more information on clipboard formats see the Microsoft Developer Network article Clipboard Formats at http msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms649013 aspx This property contains a list of clipboard formats allowed to be transferred using Remote Clipboard Therefore this
64. user If connectivity returns the Remote Display Window will return to its normal appearance and interactivity If the connection loss extends beyond the Receiver error timeout property 30 seconds in this case the Remote Display Window and the Receiver connection will be closed and the Connection Lost error dialog will be displayed The recommended Receiver timeout strategy is to set a short warning timeout property and a longer error timeout property With these settings the user is notified of potential network disruptions relatively quickly while allowing sufficient time for the network to possibly recover For networks with potential disruptions greater than two seconds a higher Receiver warning timeout property may be appropriate to lessen distraction of the user Experience has demonstrated that 30 seconds is a reasonable Receiver error timeout property although some users adjust this property lower to force connections to close sooner Higher settings such as 60 seconds are often impractical because they force the user to wait an inordinate amount of time before RGS closes the connection Advanced capabilities 120 Sender network timeout The RGS Sender supports the Sender error timeout property Rgsender Network Timeout Error This property can be set only by using the rgsenderconfig file or on a command line the Sender doesn t have a dialog to set this property The Sender error timeout property is independent of the Rec
65. 1 the user can modify all network timeout values in the RGS Receiver Control Panel If set to O the user cannot modify the values This property can be used to permanently set network timeouts before the RGS Receiver is started The default value is 1 timeout values are changeable by the user Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning int 2000 Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning IsMutable int 1 The timeout in milliseconds used to detect and notify the user of a network disruption The default value is 2 000 milliseconds 2 seconds Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error int 30000 Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error IsMutable int 1 The timeout in milliseconds used to detect and disconnect an inactive connection The default value is 30 000 milliseconds 30 seconds Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog int 15000 Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog IsMutable bool 1 This property specifies the timeout in milliseconds used to display and wait on responses from input dialogs such as the authorization dialog and the PAM authentication dialog The default value is 15 000 milliseconds 15 seconds 8 5 9 Receiver hotkey properties Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 all Hotkey settings in the Receiver Control Panel can be changed by the user If set to O none of the hotkey settings can be changed by the user This property can be used to permanently enable or disable hotkey settings before the RGS Receiver is started The default va
66. 9 to be documented on a single page while maintaining readability If you print this document it is recommended that you use a printer capable of handling letter and tabloid size paper simultaneously If your printer handles only letter size paper you should specify if available scaling to letter size or scale to tit paper in the print dialog This will cause the figure on the tabloid page to be scaled to fit on the letter size paper The tabloid page may also be printed individually if you have access to a tabloid capable printer Go to page 89 select Current Page in the print dialog and select Properties to view the paper size and orientation options Depending on your printer paper size may be listed as tabloid size B or size A3 Orientation should be set to landscape 1 6 Obtaining HP technical support iy If you encounter an issue that requires technical support please do the following prior to contacting HP for assistance e Be in front of the Local Computer or Remote Computer whichever one is appropriate Note the operating system e Note any applicable error messages e Note the applications you were using when you had the issue e Be prepared to spend the time necessary to troubleshoot the problem with the service technician For a listing of all worldwide technical support phone numbers visit www hp com support select your region and click Contact HP in the upper left corner IMPORTANT If your phone call is ans
67. At RGS 5 2 5 the capability was added to specify the port number used by the RGS Sender The default Sender port number is 42966 as noted above The Sender port number can be changed using the Rgsender Network Port property If this property is used to change the Sender port number from its default value of 42966 the Sender port number must then be specified in establishing an RGS connection from the Receiver to the Sender 2 8 Connection topologies This section describes the connection topologies supported by RGS such as how a single Local Computer may connect to multiple Remote Computers 2 8 1 The Remote Computer frame buffer After making a connection between a Local Computer and a Remote Computer the Remote Computer Sender transmits its complete frame buffer to the Local Computer The frame buffer is the memory on the Remote Computer video adapter that holds the bitmapped image that is typically displayed on a monitor for Windows XP the frame buffer contains the familiar Windows desktop see Figure 2 4 Figure 2 4 The Remote Computer frame buffer containing the Windows desktop RGS overview 21 TCP IP to Local Computer optional Computer The monitor itself is optional on the Remote Computer For example if the Remote Computer is a Personal Workstation a monitor plus a keyboard and mouse would typically be attached If the Remote Computer is an HP ProLiant Blade Workstation it is not possible to attach a monito
68. Automatic desktop locking The desktop of the Sender system locks when the primary user disconnects This prevents non primary users from being able to interact with a remote session after the primary user has disconnected This feature is supported on Windows On Linux this feature is supported on the Gnome KDE and CDE desktop environments Automatic disconnect On Linux all Receivers will disconnect when the primary user disconnects This prevents non primary users from interaction with a remote session after the primary user disconnects Automatic disconnect of non primary users on Login All non primary users are disconnected when a login event occurs Only the primary user remains connected when the desktop of the remote computer is logged in Automatic disconnect on log off All Receivers are disconnected when the primary user logs off of the remote desktop This can be disabled by setting the Rgsender IsDisconnectOnLogoutEnabled Sender property to 0 See the Sender properties for more information Connection status On Windows a desktop icon in the application tray animates when other users are connected Likewise on Linux the Sender GUI animates Collaboration notification See Section 5 5 2 Collaboration notification Connections are not allowed when an iLO remote console is enabled If the iLO remote console is enabled on a HP Blade Workstation connections to the blade using RGS are denied Disconnect all All Receive
69. D R CD RW RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 a Table B 8 DVD R W Clients based on Windows XP USB Devices HP Blade Workstation Clients and Windows XPe Pioneer DVR 111D DVDRW DVR 1 11D DVD RW RGS50 o 5 0 RGS50 o 5 0 HP en _ 5 0 RGS 5 0 sg Sony External Multiformat Table B 9 Hard drives USB Devices Workstation Chants and Windows Xe Nats OO USB Devices Workstation Clients and Windows XPe HP Pesonoi50068 resso resso gt o o Sm etehs068 resso sso This device works out of the box with Maxtor 300GB OneTouch III RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 RS Saco O Tt you also install the Maxtor One Touch software Table B 10 Floppy drives Clients based on Windows XP USB Device HP Blade Workstation Clients and Windows XPe HP 3 5 inch RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 ee Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS 192 Table B 11 Printers Clients based on Windows USB Devices HP Blade Workstation Clients XP and Windows XPe HP Officejet Pro L7680 HP OfficeJet 9110 RGS 5 0 HP ScanJet 5590 RGS 5 0 HP ScanJet G4010 Photo RGS 5 0 Scanner Cannon CanoScan LiDE 600f Color Image Scanner eee CardScan 700c RGS 5 0 CardScan Executive 800c RGS 5 0 Table B 13 Human Interface Devices The following client attached USB devices can be accessed by a Remote Computer running Windows XP Professional x64 Edition if the RGS Sender version is 5 1 1 or later USB Deves HP Blade Workstation Cents XP ard Windows Per Noes USB Devices HP Blade Workst
70. EEN EEE EE AEE EE 167 10 2 PIP GINOle log Orna ea R E E E 167 10 3 E a AE E E E E E 170 10 4 eE IG E E EN O EE E A A EE E E A ES 173 10 5 Additional safeguard features for Windows systems cccccccssseeeccceceseeeeceeeceseeeeeeeeeesaee esses 174 Optimizing RGS performance 11 1 Performance tuning for all DIGHOTAIS z c0 c122nSenec lt hesandatectensessbabendedesannaatebandassdecasaasdecndossdeanncoae 176 11 2 Performance tuning for Windows vy ecteises yc aseacs sence sasiensnasett bennacbaaasy sien boaseuaereteatantouasaceuneean 176 11 3 Troubleshooting graphics performance cccccccsseeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeessuaeeeeeeeeaaeeees 177 11 4 Configuring your network for optimal performance ccccsccccccce sss eeeeceeeeseeeeeeeseesaeeeeeeeeeaaeees 177 Troubleshooting RGS 12 1 Potential RGS issues and troubleshooting SUGGESTIONS cccceseeccceseeeceeeeeeeceeeueeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaees 179 RGS error messages 13 1 Receiver erroi Messages ee 180 Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI Pel VMware ESX networking considerations lt scesccq charesasncausndactdonacseeedecanetes seacieouiecdmciinsbeeeesincaccesensies eunenes 184 Contents 6 A 2U ing RO SIN SII C AP VD eers os a N E E EE tac enteoesensacenncdadeoetes 184 AZI Create o new WING machine acca ccqnabaacsctseuesesadencnceueduceclyesss concussed O EE epeo eE Eea 184 A 2 2 Modify the VMware ESX configuration vmx file ccccccccccccccsseeeeececesseeeeeeeeess
71. GS and then connects with RDC using the same credentials as the RGS connection the RDC connection displaces the RGS connection In this case the RGS Sender will disconnect all Receivers including all RGS collaborators The Windows desktop session remains active during the switch If an RDC user disconnects from a Remote Computer using the RDC disconnect button the session remains logged in and all applications continue to run The session however locks its screen An RGS connection works only if the credentials match the currently logged in user If a user logs out of their session while using RDC the RGS Sender returns the system to its initial logged out state Any authorized user can connect and log into this system using RGS An RDC connection made to a Sender already occupied with a RGS connection by a non matching user prompts the new user to logout the current RGS user Only administrators can log out other users Non administrators are refused with a warning message about permissions If RDC logs out the current RGS user then the Sender disconnects all of its receivers including all RGS collaborators Under reverse circumstances for the above RGS connections will not log out an existing RDC user regardless of authority RGS will report an authorization failure message concerning a different user owning the desktop 2 20 Using RGS with desktop virtualization In addition to using RGS to capture compress and transmit the cont
72. GS connection However if the user logs out of the RDP session the RGS Sender will be unable to access the desktop for about 60 seconds If this property is set to 1 the desktop will be available to RGS almost immediately The RGS Sender will monitor the RDP session for a logout and begin the process of making the desktop available as soon as the logout is detected If set to O the RGS Sender will not monitor the RDP session for a logout The default is 1 allow quick access to the Windows desktop after Remote Desktop logout Rgsender IsCopyRegionEnabled bool 1 If set to 1 RGS Copy Regions are sent from the Sender to the Receiver If set to 0 RGS Copy Regions are turned off and will be sent to the Receiver as Image Update Regions This is for advanced use and should not be set The default value is 1 send RGS Copy Regions Rgsender IsRegionLimitEnabled bool 0 This property is used to limit the number of update rectangles in a update region This is for advanced use and should not be set The default value is O don t limit regions Rgsender IsDisconnectOnLogoutEnabled bool 1 If set to 1 the RGS connection will be disconnected when the user logs out If set to O the RGS connection will remain connected to the Sender when the user logs out The default value is 1 always disconnect when the user logs out Rgsender IsSnapToCodecEnabled bool 1 If set to 1 the HP Codec will be aligned or snapped to tile boundaries This wil
73. Login Standard Login is the process by which a local user attempts to connect to a Remote Computer that has neither Single Sign on nor Easy Login enabled Figure 5 10 on the next page shows the Standard Login process Figure 5 10 also shows the process followed by the primary user after logging in Using RGS 88 If another user attempts to connect to the Remote Computer with the yc el local user attempt to log in using Standard Login Attempt to connect to Remote Computer Windows to Windows Authenticate to 10 10 42 65 connection AND local user credentials match any credentials Enter domain username and password if authenticating against a computer in a domain Enter hostname username if authenticating against a computer in a workgroup Figure 5 10 Local user Standard Login process and primary user flowchart RGS authentication dialog authenticating the connection User name 10 10 62 65 Administrator on Remote Computer Password eeeeesee silent authentication authentication succeeded 9 same credentials as the local user the local user Remote Display Window below will terminate Login dialog in Remote Display Window another user already logged into the Remote Computer the primary user credentials of local user match the credentials of the primary Is desktop
74. Login Process cece ties tees late eriraets onsen aes ON Rosemead a 90 Rigure 5 1 2 Single Sigh On Process miceniene anal Alea AA E eee aap eee ane 9 Figure 5 13 Dialog indicating that the password must be changed ccsseeccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeseeseeeaaeneeees 92 Figure 5 14 Change Password diolog wes saan neha a stieectdiare AAE T EEEN mae ie 92 Figure 5 15 Multiple local users can view and interact with the primary user s desktop cccceccceeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 93 Figure 5 16 Disabling of the local users mice and keyboards by the primary user ccccccccceesseeeeeceeesseeeeeees 93 Figure 5 17 Primary user dialog to authorize a local user to connect to the primary user s desktop eeeeeeees 94 Figure 5 18 Collaboration notification dialog displayed on the Sender and in each Remote Display Window 94 Figure 5 19 Windows Sender GUI to disconnect non primary USELS cccceseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeasaeeeeees 95 Figure 6 1 Tabs to access advanced RGS capabilities 5 sess ohn vvetic soe cesesenciandtnd costeneesvcnvasbaanentieh ents 96 Figure O 2 Gener dl TOD GOONS onnon A Gent tatnadacohts ATEN 97 Figure 6 3 Sound and Audio Devices Properties didloG w ecccsesssserieserssstreslecactaseveseteneiereiaumeugeteebideseeeecceees 98 Figure 6 4 Microphone device selection and audio playback device selection on the Sender ccceeeeseeeeeeees 99 Figure O 5 Recording Control W
75. Login will be used In terms of selecting between Single Sign on and Easy Login two factors to consider are e f Single Sign on is used with HP Session Allocation Manager SAM the user will only need to enter their credentials once to connect to multiple Remote Computers The credentials are entered when authenticating with SAM thereatter each RGS connection is automatically authenticated and a Remote Display Window from each Remote Computer is automatically displayed on the Local Computer e Easy Login supports GINA Graphical Identification and Authentication chaining allowing custom 3 party login mechanisms to be integrated into RGS Single Sign on does not support chaining of 3 party GINA modules For example a 3 party fingerprint reader will typically install a custom GINA module The GINA module will allow the user to be authenticated through their standard username password mechanism because the GINA modules are chaining or with their fingerprint The fingerprint reader would be physically attached to the Local Computer but would be logically connected to the Remote Computer using remote USB If Easy Login is used only a single login step is required the fingerprint reader will provide the credentials for logging into the Remote Computer RGS overview 26 2 11 RGS operating modes RGS supports two basic operating modes 1 Normal Mode This mode enables RGS to connect to a single Remote Computer as described in Section
76. Mute SoundMA Digital Audio Advanced capabilities 101 The next volume control to adjust is the mixer line in the Recording Control window The name of this line varies with different audio devices See the Windows Sender Audio Installation section for information on how to determine the name of this control For our example the control is called Wave Out Mix Adjust this volume control while playing a sound At higher levels the audio signal gets clamped and the signal becomes distorted Decrease the level until the sound becomes clear On some devices the mixer volume control does not go to zero In this case the Wave line of the Volume Control will need to be reduced Figure 6 9 demonstrates the Wave Out Mix level needed to eliminate distortion Figure 6 9 Recording Control window H Recording Control Options Help LD Player Microphone Line In Wave Lut Mix Balance Balance Balance Balance gt gt db 4b Z 4e Z 4 Volume Volume Volume Volume ar T h mi Select Select Select Select SoundMA Digital Audio Advanced capabilities 102 The best sound to play to calibrate your audio device is a low frequency sound with high amplitude By default Windows has a program event that meets these requirements To play this sound open up the Sound and Audio Devices Properties window and click on the Sounds tab as shown in Figure 6 10 Figure 6 10 Sound and Audio Devices Properties window sounds and Audio Devices
77. ONAL Ensure RGS Sender licensing is set up Beginning at RGS 5 2 0 HP implemented licensing for the RGS Sender For an overview of RGS licensing see Section 2 3 RGS licensing For detailed information on RGS licensing see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_manuals Ef NOTE The Sender licensing check is optional because you can establish a connection from the Receiver to the Sender without a Sender license However as shown in Figure 2 3 an error dialog will be displayed in the Remote Display Window if the Sender license file is missing or invalid If you don t set up RGS licensing now you can do it after you ve verified you can establish an RGS connection e Ensure you have a login account on the Remote Computer When establishing an RGS connection the Remote Computer will prompt you for a user name and password Ensure that you have a login account on the Remote Computer e Verity the Remote Computer login account does not have a blank password The Remote Computer will not allow a connection for any account with a blank or undefined password Any accounts on the Remote Computer used for connection by the Local Computer must have password protection e OPTIONAL Disable Guest login access By default Windows allows any user who can access a computer over the network to login with Guest access Because this is a potential security issue HP recommends that Pre connection check
78. P dc 3 Blade WS Client HP xw and z series HP ThinPro GI HP Blade WS Client HP Blade WS Client HP dc 2 Blade WS Client Mobile Thin Clients may not be suitable tor 720p and higher multi media content HP 441 Ot WES HP 6720t XPe HP 2533t XPe Flexible and Mainstream Thin Clients may not be suitable tor 20p and higher multi media content HP t5 30w ES HP t5630w WES HP t5 30 XPe HP t5630 XPe HP 5720 XPe HP t5545 Oy Q HP ThinPro multi media instruction extension 32 bit color display adapter and 512 MB minimum RAM Desktop receiver systems require Sender Support Windows XP Professional SP1 SP2 Windows Vista Business Ultimate and RHEL V4 update 5 or later V5 update Matrix SP3 32 BIT X64 Enterprise 32 bit 64 bit 2 or later 64 bit Blade Clients FP Blade FCS E Desktops Hz or greater processor with SSE2 Personal Workstations Mobile Workstations Desktop PCs Notebook PCs UN nN mM NO Desktop sender systems require 1 5 GHz or greater processor wit multi media instruction extension 32 bit color display adapter and 512 MB minimum RAM Microsoft Windows Vista Aero theme desktop running on a Sender requires an nVidia graphics card and a compatible nVidia driver Supported VDI Client Virtualization Software VMware ESX 3 01 3 02 3 02 Update 1 ESX 3 03 ESX 3 5 Update 1 2 3 4 and ESX 4 0 In this document references to Windows in the context of the RGS Sender ref
79. RGS Sender Two types of client computers are listed e HP Blade Workstation Clients such as the HP dc73 Blade Workstation Client e Clients based on Windows XP and Windows XPe such as a PC running Windows XP or a thin client running Windows XPe For the two types of client computers the first RGS release supporting each USB device is listed It is assumed that both the RGS Sender and Receiver are running the same version of RGS Unless otherwise noted the RGS Sender is running on Microsoft Windows XP Professional 32 bit edition If a cell is grayed out for a USB device that device is not supported on the associated client computer Table B 1 PDA devices Clients based on Windows XP USB Devices HP Blade Workstation Clients and Windows XPe en P aen 71004 er slackbory 8100 Blackberry 8300 Blackberry 8310 Blackberry 8320 Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS 190 Table B 2 Trader keyboards Clients based on Windows XP and USB Devices HP Blade Workstation Clients Windows XPe Bloomberg CTB100 US UK RGS 4 0 0 RGS 5 0 Support a audio was Bloomberg SEA100 US UK RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 added at RGS 5 2 0 Bloomberg FRE100 US UK RGS 5 2 RGS 5 2 n Table B 3 Trader keypads a en A USB Devices Clients and Windows XPe CCA Designs CovenexKPU C1 res4o2 resso CamorEsped2 sazo sso S Cantor ESsped6 resaz20 esso o CamtorEsped7 sazo resso S CanorESped8 resaz0 esso RBS Greenwich Copitcl gSpecd Res420 res
80. S Receiver establishes a connection to the Remote Computer requests graphics updates from the Remote Computer Sender and displays the desktop of the Remote Computer inside a window on the Local Computer The RGS Receiver transmits keyboard and mouse events to the RGS Sender The RGS Sender captures the actual screen pixels that are generated by the graphics adapter on the Remote Computer This process is often referred to as screen scraping and operates independently of whether or not a monitor is actually connected to the Remote Computer f NOTE HP RGS uses a pull model when establishing a connection in contrast to a push model With a pull model the connection is established by the Local Computer user who uses the RGS Receiver to pull the connection from the Remote Computer RGS Sender This is in contrast to a push model where the Remote Computer would push the connection to the Local Computer The pull model is preferred because in many cases the Remote Computer RGS Sender is operating unattended and there is no user to establish a connection 27 NOTE Local user refers to the person physically located at the Local Computer Remote user refers to the person physically located at the Remote Computer if in fact a person is present at the Remote Computer A local user who establishes an RGS login to the Remote Computer is known as the primary user Once a primary user has been established another local user can view
81. SB device to a Remote Computer The options available under the USB tab in the Receiver Control Panel are shown in Figure 6 13 Figure 6 13 USB tab options HP Remote Graphics Receiver Disconnect All Connect All TI General Audio USE Network Hotkeys Clipboard Loggir Enable Remote USB select sender 10 10 42 65 vw The USB options are e Enable Remote USB This checkbox can be used to dynamically during an active RGS connection enable or disable USB connections to the Remote Computer When enabled USB devices plugged into the Local Computer appear to the Remote Computer as locally attached devices Because remote USB supports hot plug connections it is not necessary to disable remote USB before plugging or unplugging USB devices on the Local Computer e Select sender If multiple Remote Computers are specified in Directory Mode the Select sender drop down menu is used to select which Remote Computer Sender receives the remote USB connection In Figure 6 13 the RGS Receiver is operating in Directory Mode and the Remote Computer at IP address 10 10 42 65 is selected to receive the remote USB connection f NOTE Directory Mode operation is discussed in Chapter 7 Using Directory Mode Advanced capabilities 107 Figure 6 14 shows the presence of the USB drive key on the Local Computer before the remote USB attachment is made Figure 6 14 Prior
82. TE For clarity the individual IsMutable properties are not shown in the previous list however they are included in the following detailed description of each property NOTE In order for the user to be able to interactively change a property the group IsMutable property and the individual IsMutable property must both be 1 true If either IsMutable property is O false the user will not be able to interactively change the associated property RGS properties 143 In Figure 8 2 the Receiver is started with the command line option Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error IsMutable 0 which prevents the user from changing the value of the network timeout error property Figure 8 2 The Receiver timeout error IsMutable property is set to O ex COWWINDOWS system3 cmd exe se Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver rgreceiver Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error IsMutable Because the Receiver timeout error property IsMutable property is O the Receiver timeout error property cannot be changed by the user in the Receiver Control Panel see Figure 8 3 Figure 8 3 The Receiver timeout error property menu is grayed out HP Remote Graphics Receiver Hostname Disconnect About setup Mode 4 p Adwanced gt gt gt General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Logging Statistics Ti uts second imeouts secon 3 The user interface to Error change the Receiver ama Oer timeout error pr
83. The file has been moved or is no longer available 3 The network is down or experiencing a disruption 4 The user does not have read permission on the file The username of the current user of the HP Remote Graphics Software Receiver is not found in the directory file Possible reasons include 1 The username entered in the directory tile does not exactly match the real username The username of the current user is not entered in the directory If the directory tile is on a shared drive with restrictive permissions consult an IT specialist to add the proper entry The connection was authenticated but another user is already logged into the desktop of the Sender system When a connection is attempted to another user s desktop a dialog is displayed on the Sender desktop asking the logged in user to allow the connection A user is not allowed to connect to another user s desktop unless they are explicitly authorized Either the connection was not granted access or the dialog timed out and the connection was implicitly denied A license was not found for the RGS Sender The license has expired for the RGS Sender The license is invalid for the RGS Sender Setup Mode hotkey The key sequence specified by the user is too short sequence too short Setup Mode hotkey The key sequence specitied by the user is too long sequence too long Setup Mode hotkey sequence may only consist of Ctrl Alt Shift and Space A space may onl
84. U intensive tasks may disrupt the audio stream The Windows Task Manager may help you identify such a task Another possible problem may be a bad network setup PC speaker sounds not working The Sender captures all audio information sent through the mixer This includes most audio alerts MIDI Direct Sound and Direct Music Sounds generated by the PC speaker are not captured by the Sender and will not be transmitted Audible pops and glitches in sound This is most likely because the network bandwidth or system resources are starving the audio streaming from continuous play e Try a lower audio quality setting to reduce network bandwidth usage e Be sure you system is not doing something so computationally intensive that it is starving RGS from keeping up with graphics and audio processing Enabling audio causes continuous network traffic When the Sender detects an audio signal that signal is sent to the Receiver If the audio device on the Sender is silent there should not be any network traffic due to audio If the audio device is generating a large amount of noise that noise may be interpreted as an audio signal and be sent to the Receiver This may occur when something is connected to the Line In port of the audio device Reducing volume levels or disconnecting any external devices may help reduce the interference ToggleKeys sound not working The Accessibility control in Windows will play a sound when some control keys are presse
85. Volume Volume Select Select Select Select SoundMA Digital Audio After selecting the mixer the Sender should record audio information and send it to the Receiver See the following section to improve the audio quality If you are not receiving an audio signal refer to the Windows Audio Troubleshooting section 6 2 2 Calibrating audio on the Microsoft Windows XP Professional Sender The audio signal captured by the Sender is modified by two different device driver volume controls and then the master volume level is artificially inserted into the signal If these volume controls are too low you might not hear the audio signal If they are too high the signal might be distorted This section describes a technique to hand tune the volume controls to reduce the amount of distortion These operations should be performed while connected to the Sender through the Receiver The Wave line of the volume control is the first volume control to affect the audio signal outside of the application that generates the signal Setting this value to the maximum level gives you the most resolution in your audio signal Figure 6 8 shows the Wave volume control at its maximum level Figure 6 8 Volume control window 4a Volume Control Options Help Volume Control Wi ave Sy Synth CD Player Line Ir Balance Balance Balance Balance Balance Paice e eae me ae a ike Volume volume Volume Volume volume T Oo 7 Mute all Mute
86. a Select the Control Panel b Bring up the Display Properties window c Select the Desktop tab and set the background to None Alternatively select the Themes tab and select Windows Classic in the Theme box e Set the Sender and Receiver to 32 bits per pixel On Windows perform the following a Select the Control Panel b Bring up the Display Properties window c Select the Settings tab and set the Color Quality to Highest 32 bit e Lower the Sender display resolution RGS is an image based remote visualization technology Therefore lowering the Sender display resolution can significantly improve performance 11 2 Performance tuning for Windows This section provides performance tuning tips for RGS on Windows e Lock desktop icons on the Remote Computer by performing the following steps a Select the Control Panel b Bring up the Display Properties window c Select the Desktop tab and select Customize Desktop d On the Web tab check Lock desktop items e Sender process priority Occasionally an activity such as rotating a model in a 3D design program may appear slow and erratic and image update may appear inconsistent If the Sender is running on Windows OS scheduling may be an issue This can often be resolved by increasing the process priority of the Sender See the section Setting the Windows Sender process priority for further details e Java Applications Some recent versions of the Java Runtime Environment
87. a local license file key A separate HP RGS VDI license is required for each virtual machine using RGS 3 HP RGS Desktop local license This RGS product runs on all RGS supported platforms including notebooks desktop PCs mobile workstations personal workstations and HP blade workstations In addition this key will also run on VMware VDI and HP Blade PC platforms that are supported by the RGS VDI license key 4 HP RGS Desktop floating license This RGS product runs on all RGS supported platforms including notebooks desktop PCs mobile workstations personal workstations and HP blade workstations In addition this key will also run on VMware VDI and HP Blade PC platforms that are supported by the RGS VDI license key All RGS products include the same RGS Sender and the same RGS Receiver The RGS Receiver is unlicensed and can be installed on any number of computers IMPORTANT Except for the 60 day HP RGS Desktop Trial Edition the above RGS products never expire once they are installed and licensed When you purchase RGS you are entitled to free upgrades to all future patch releases For example if you purchase RGS 5 3 0 you are entitled to a free upgrade to patch release 5 3 1 if available In order to upgrade to new enhancement releases you must purchase RGS Software Assurance or re purchase a new license at upgrade time To ensure you can download and install future minor and major releases such as RGS 5 4 or 6 0 HP offe
88. a thumbnail image of each Remote Display Window Figure 7 3 Remote Display Window selection dialog To display the selection dialog press the TAB key while in Setup Mode again Setup Mode must have been previously activated by the hotkey sequence The selection dialog is displayed as long as the initial Setup Mode hotkey normally the Shift key remains pressed The currently selected Remote Display Window is highlighted with a red border The Remote Display Window selection dialog is only displayed in Directory Mode this is the mode that supports multiple Remote Display Windows While the Remote Display Window selection dialog is active navigate between windows thumbnails by e Pressing TAB to select the next window e Clicking on the number displayed beneath the thumbnail e Clicking directly on a thumbnail e Double clicking the mouse on a thumbnail this will also immediately close the selection dialog When the initial Setup Mode hotkey is released the selected Remote Display Window is brought to the forefront and displayed Using Directory Mode 138 8 RGS properties RGS allows the user to specify many properties of the RGS connection both on the Sender and Receiver By specifying properties the user can modify RGS characteristics such as e Display of borders on the Remote Display Window e Codec quality e Audio quality e Connection timeouts This chapter describes each of the RGS properties their default values
89. able bool 1 Used in Directory Mode to set the name and location of the file that lists the Remote Computers assigned to the current user The default value is directory txt Rgreceiver MaxSenderListSize int 5 Rgreceiver MaxSenderListSize IsMutable bool 1 In Normal Mode the Receiver keeps a list of the Senders that it has most recently connected to Figure 8 4 shows the Receiver Control Panel dialog that this property applies to This property specities the maximum number of Remote Computers the Receiver will keep on its list in Figure 8 4 two Remote Computers Senders are on the list The Receiver will keep the most recently connected Remote Computers on its list up to the maximum number specitied by this property Figure 8 4 The Receiver maintains a list of the most recently connected Senders HP Remote Graphics Receiver ai Hostname I Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If this property is enabled the Local Computer Receiver will attempt to set the resolution of the Remote Computer to the same full screen resolution of the Local Computer If the Local Computer display resolution is not supported by the Remote Computer the connection occurs at the existing Remote Computer Sender resolution and a warning dialog is issued to the user The original pre moditication Remote Computer display resolution is restored when the RGS
90. actually activating Setup Mode where the first key is likewise held down while the other key s are pressed and released followed by releasing of the first key As you press and release the keys the key sequence is displayed in the dialog box To define a sequence that is side insensitive you ll need to modify the property value from outside of the GUI while RGS is not running See Section 8 5 9 Receiver hotkey properties for information on modifying the sequence from outside of the GUI Pressing the Reset button on the Receiver Control Panel restores the Setup Mode hotkey sequence to its original default values Advanced capabilities 125 6 6 Remote Clipboard operation For an overview of Remote Clipboard see Section 2 18 Remote Clipboard overview Remote Clipboard enables you to cut or copy data between a window on the Local Computer and a Remote Window provided that the applications being used support cut copy paste functionality Beginning with RGS 5 3 0 Remote Clipboard cut and paste of ANSI text data is supported between Microsoft Windows Receiver systems and Linux Sender systems Successful operation of the clipboard on Linux systems in RGS will depend on how the application interacts with the graphical desktop s clipboard Some application s use of the clipboard may not work as expected with RGS Remote Clipboard With most applications you will need to perform cut or copy actions by Highlighting the text of interest
91. al Audio USE Network Hotkeys Logging Statistics Console Logging Enable File Logging Enable Log File C Documents and Settings recerver_onlyhpremotermgreceryerrg log Max logfile size 1024KB Logfile backups 5 Log level INFO Clear Log Restore Detaults DEBUG INFO ERROR FATAL The options available under the Logging tab are e Console logging Enables logging to the console standard output This option is only available on Linux e File logging Enables logging to the specified Log File The spinboxes for Max logfile size and Log file backups limit the maximum logfile size and the number of backup logfiles respectively e Log level Determines the level of information that is logged For example if WARN is selected the log file will contain information of type WARN and below that is WARN ERROR and FATAL To log all intormation generated by the Receiver select DEBUG 27 NOTE In order to log Remote Clipboard activities on the Receiver DEBUG level logging must be selected e Clear Log Clears the contents of the log file e View Log Displays the contents of the log file in a window e Restore Defaults Resets all logging settings to default values Advanced capabilities 133 6 7 2 Sender logging Ky g RGS Sender logging is not controlled by a GUI instead Sender logging is controlled by a particular file on the RGS Sender In Section 3 1 2 Installing the Sender on
92. alDisplay IsPreferredResolutionEnabled e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionHeight e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionwidth With the exception of the general properties and the microphone property all Receiver property groups have an IsMutable property the group IsMutable property The IsMutable property is always of type bool For example Rgreceiver Audio IsMutable 1 When the group IsMutable property is 1 true the user is allowed to interactively change the other properties in the audio group by using for example the Receiver Control Panel When the group IsMutable property is O false the user is prevented from interactively changing the other properties in the group All group IsMutuable properties have a default value of 1 which allows the user to interactively change the other properties in the group With RGS 5 0 a new IsMutable feature was added Each of the individual properties now has an associated IsMutable Boolean property to control whether each individual property can be interactively changed by the user this is the individual IsMutable property For example the Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error property now has the individual Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error IsMutable property If this individual IsMutable property is true the user is allowed to interactively change the associated property that is the Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error property NO
93. alog is displayed E Display for the primary user ey agg a ce gamer Window ae a eed Baa Cheb Ded oo doc oe Co does Remote Display Window is terminated when primary user unlocks desktop or re connects local user will need to reconnect N 5 4uthorization failed You were authenticated but 4 different user is already logged into the desktop of the Sender system When you attempt to connect to a another user s desktop a dialog is displayed on the Sender desktop asking the logged in user to allow your connection 4 user is not allowed to connect to another user s desktop unless they are explicitly allowed authorized Either you were not granted access or the dialog timed ouk and you were implicitly denied access Remote Display Window Ez primary user Remote i did Displa Wido someone else log in with my credentials press Remote Display Window terminated did someone else log in with my credentials Now a local user with an authenticated connection IS HP Remote Graphics Sender x another Y user attempting Respond o connect to dialog did someone else log in with my credentials Remote Display Window terminated now a local user local user Using RGS 89 5 3 2 Easy Login The Easy Login flowchart is shown in Figure 5 11 If the Easy Login conditions are met the RGS connection authe
94. an be used on any number of computers For an overview of RGS licensing see Section 2 3 RGS licensing For detailed information on RGS licensing see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_ manuals This guide is organized as follows Chapter 1 Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Sottware This chapter provides an introduction to RGS describing a typical RGS configuration and the roles of the Local and Remote Computers This chapter also describes the primary features of RGS Chapter 2 RGS overview This chapter gives an overview of the RGS capabilities including the supported computers and operating systems RGS connection topologies multi monitor configurations licensing information remote USB and remote audio Chapter 3 Installing RGS Installation of the RGS Sender and Receiver is described in this chapter Chapter 4 Pre connection checklist Establishing an RGS connection from a Receiver to a Sender requires that the Local and Remote Computers be in the correct state This chapter provides a checklist of items that should be verified before attempting an RGS connection Chapter 5 Using RGS This chapter describes how to use RGS Establishing a connection from the Local Computer to the Remote Computer in Normal Mode is described including the different login methods Features such as collaboration are also described Chapter 6 Advanced capabilities This chapter descr
95. and selecting the Cut or Copy action normally found in the application s Edit menu Following installation Remote Clipboard on Windows can be enabled or disabled via a toggle in the Receiver s controls Remote Clipboard on Linux is installed by default and is enabled or disabled via a toggle in the Receiver s controls Both cut and paste and copy and paste are supported in the following scenarios at RGS 5 3 0 Between a Local Window and a Remote Display Window in both directions The Remote Computer may be running Windows or Linux The Local Computer must be running Windows Between two Remote Display Windows in both directions In this case the Local Computer can be running either Windows or Linux the Remote Computers may be running Windows or Linux Ef NOTE For simplicity the phrase cut and paste is used hereafter to refer to both cut and paste as well as copy and paste The Enable remote clipboard checkbox under the Clipboard tab in the Receiver Control Panel allows the user to enable or disable Remote Clipboard see Figure 6 24 Figure 6 24 Enable remote clipboard checkbox Ca p Fa pas 7 SO m a E em ma M m ur a T ca a ye Pr ae sO ee ear o T ee General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Clipboard Loggir Enable remote clippoara a 7 F a m PEE TA gj mm E e e T E E ae m See Section 8 5 10 Receiver clipboard properties and Section 8 6 7
96. and version 1 3 used DirectX To see screen updates on Windows XP Professional with these versions of Java Automatic 3D Updates must be enabled see Using the rgadmin tool Rendering through DirectX will often cause the entire DirectX window to be registered as a screen modification This can result in higher bandwidth and slightly higher CPU utilization by the Remote Graphics Sender In some cases performance may be improved by using GDI rather than DirectX with Java To use GDI with Java the Dsun java2d noddraw true option needs to be supplied to the java or javaw executable For example java Dsun java2d noddraw true SomeApp This can be done by passing this option on the command line or adding this option to the JAVA_OPTIONS environment variable For example set JAVA_OPTIONS Dsun java2d noddraw true Optimizing RGS pertormance 176 java SomeApp 11 3 Troubleshooting graphics performance The dominant factor impacting performance on the Sender is the frame buffer read performance of the graphics adapter Frame buffer read performance of at least ten frames per second is recommended for optimum RGS performance RGS uses the Remote Computer graphics adapter to accelerate rendering of the image After the image on the Remote Computer is modified the RGS Sender reads the rendered image from the frame buffer compresses it and transmits it to the Receiver On Windows use BlitTest to test the frame buffer read performance of the
97. ard Mouse Disconnect Help About The following options are provided by the Sender GUI e Remote Keyboard Mouse gt Enable or Disable If Disable is selected all local users are in view only mode only the primary user can control the Remote Computer desktop using a keyboard and mouse If Enable is selected all local users and the primary user can interact with the Remote Computer desktop Disconnect gt Non Primary Users or All Users Disconnects Receiver sessions for either non primary users or all users e Help Displays the RGS Help system e About Displays the RGS program information Manually starting and stopping the Sender on Windows By default the Sender installs one executable as a Windows Service This is necessary to enable some features such as the ability to send CTRL ALT DEL key sequences and also view locked screens Additionally installing the Sender service executable as a service allows Windows to automatically start the Sender service process when the computer is started You can control Windows Services by accessing the Services panel The Services panel can be accessed from the Windows Control Panel and selecting Administrative Tools Figure 3 9 shows the Administrative Tool for Services The Remote Graphics Sender is highlighted The status of the service is Started and the service is configured to start up automatically By right clicking on the Remote Graphics Sender service the ser
98. arning dialog shown in Figure 5 7 will not be displayed For more details on this property see Section 8 6 2 Sender general properties 5 2 Linux connection considerations 5 2 1 Full screen crosshair cursors Certain applications that use large crosshair cursors for example PTC ICEM Surf uses a full screen crosshair cursor will not display correctly on the Receiver Full screen crosshair cursors can be disabled by typing the following in a terminal window usr contrib bin X1lxprop root remove SGI CROSSHAIR CURSOR usr contrib bin Xllxprop root remove HP CROSSHAIR CURSOR This will force the application to use an X cursor which will display correctly on the Receiver 5 2 2 Gamma correction on the Receiver The color on a 3D application on the Sender can look incorrect when displayed on a Receiver This is because the gamma of the Local Computer monitor may not match the gamma of the Remote Computer monitor To correct this any tool that will adjust the gamma for a display can be used Some tools will adjust the gamma for the entire monitor while others will adjust the gamma on a per window basis Per window tools that can be used to adjust only the Receiver window will provide the best results 5 2 3 Black or blank connection session with the Linux Sender Connection to an X server that is configured with less than 24 bit or 32 bit default visuals depending on the graphics device will cause the Linux Sender to generate a
99. as listed in paragraph 2 above the latter property is a don t care and its setting is ignored If the above conditions are met the Receiver will determine the physical displays that are contained within the Receiver Remote Display Window specified by these properties Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow xX Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow Y Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionWidth Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionHeight The Receiver will try to set the layout of the Remote Computer Sender physical displays to match the physical displays contained in this window For example if the Receiver has the following e Two physical displays in a 1x2 layout e An overall virtual display resolution of 2560x1024 1280x1024x2 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow xX 1280 e Rgreceiver Session lt N gt RemoteDisplayWindow Y O Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionWidth 1280 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionHeight 1024 Then the Receiver will determine that one physical display with a resolution of 1280x1024 is contained within the window The Receiver will try to set the layout of the Remote Computer Sender to a single physical display and a resolution of 1280x1024 If the following conditions are met 1 This property is enabled 2 Rgreceiver lsMatchReceiverResoluti
100. ation Clients XP and Windows XPe e spaesato RGSAO2 o O asso O oo Magen spaceman tesao J sso esra O O esso sso Table B 14 Enclosure HP Blade Workstation Clients based on Windows USB Devices Clients XP and Windows XPe The enclosure works but the Adaptec USB 2 0 enclosure behavior can differ depending for IDE hard drives eae aa on the drive used inside the enclosure Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS 193 Table B 15 Webcams USB Devices Logitech QuickCam Communicate Deluxe WebCam eee cient pod Windows Xho Nets USB Devices Clients XP and Windows XPe Plantronics USB Audio 470 Headset o RGSS RGS52 ff Plantronics USB Audio 500 Headset o RGSS RESZ ff Plantronics USB Audio 625 Headset C RGSS RGSS 2 fp oew s Table B 18 Sound recording devices In addition to the USB sound recording devices listed below any USB sound recording device supported by Windows can be connected to the Local Computer when the Remote USB Configuration setting is USB Devices are Local In this case the Receiver RGS Audio Recorder is used not the Remote USB driver see Section 2 17 1 Remote audio on Windows for further details USB Devices Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS 194 Table B 19 Character input devices Clients based on Windows USB Devices HP Blade Workstation Clients XP and Windows XPe Elan Crystal Touch Pen Pad C RGSS 5 2 L RGS52 5 2 Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS 195 Ap
101. available the entire RGS product including both the RGS Sender and Receiver would be included in the patch release 2 3 RGS licensing i IMPORTANT RGS licensing applies to the RGS Sender only The RGS Receiver is a free download and can be used on any number of computers Therefore the following discussion of RGS licensing applies only to the RGS Sender For detailed information on RGS licensing see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_manuals Two types of licenses are supported by the RGS Sender e Local license file With local licenses each system running the RGS Sender requires a license file A license must be purchased and the license file installed for each RGS Sender computer e Floating licenses With floating licenses a pool of RGS licenses is purchased which are dynamically allocated on a first come first serve basis whenever an RGS Receiver first attempts to connect to an RGS Sender In licensing terminology a floating license is checked out when a connection is established to the RGS Sender and is checked in when the connection terminates Floating licenses allow a company to RGS overview 19 purchase for example 75 licenses but support a user community of perhaps hundreds of users as long as no more than 75 users ever attempt to establish an RGS connection simultaneously Floating licenses require a license server which can be installed on one of the computers ru
102. black or blank connection screen For example some default installations may configure a 16 bit visual in etc X1 1 XF86Config after the installation Reconfiguring the X server to serve 24 bit or 32 bit default visuals and restarting the X server will usually fix the black or blank connection situation Using RGS 87 5 3 RGS login methods RGS provides three methods for the local user to log into a Remote Computer Standard Login supported on Windows and Linux Senders For an overview of Standard Login see Section 2 9 Establishing an RGS connection using Standard Login Easy Login supported on Windows XP Professional Senders on HP blade workstations Single Sign on supported on Windows XP Professional Senders on HP blade workstations and HP personal workstations For an overview of Single Sign on and Easy Login see Section 2 10 Single Sign on and Easy The log in method that is used is dependent on how the Sender was installed see Figure 3 4 If neither Easy Login nor Single Sign on was enabled during installation Standard Login is used see Figure 5 9 Figure 5 9 Log in selection flowchart local user Connect is Easy Login enabled Is Single Sign on enabled attempt to log in using Standard Login attempt to log in using Easy Login attempt to log in using Single Sign on Each of these login methods is described in the following three sections 5 3 1 Standard
103. ble only Once a USB device is established as locally accessible or remotely accessible its status can only be changed by removing and inserting the device while in the alternate RGS connection state either connected or not connected For example to make a locally accessible USB device remotely accessible the USB device needs to be removed and inserted after an RGS connection is established 2 16 4 Unique smartcard handling New with RGS 5 1 3 is unique handling of USB smartcard readers including Common Access Card CAC readers Prior to RGS 5 1 3 smartcard readers were handled in the same manner as other USB devices as described above With RGS 5 1 3 smartcard readers are now handled in a unique manner as follows e Unique smartcard handling requires on the Sender that Easy Login be enabled and that the chaining GINA module msgina d11 be utilized e Unique smartcard handling also requires that the Local and Remote Computers both be running Windows e For USB configuration settings USB devices are Remote and USB devices are Local Remote smartcard readers will always be accessible by the Local Computer prior to establishing a connection to a Remote Computer This is to allow the smartcard reader to be used by the Local Computer prior to using the smartcard to authenticate access to the Remote Computer e Figure 2 20 shows the local and remote accessibility of the smartcard reader for USB configuration settings USB devices
104. bling mute on some devices will prevent audio from arriving at the Receiver The Realtek audio device used in the HP xw4300 has this issue One possible solution when running the 32 bit version of Windows is to disable the audio device prior to installing the Sender This will cause the HP Remote Audio device driver to be installed The real audio device and the HP Remote Audio device should not be enabled at the same time The Sender will connect to the first audio device it detects which may not be the device that is selected by the user Advanced capabilities 103 6 2 4 Using audio The audio controls in the Receiver Control Panel are shown in Figure 6 11 Figure 6 11 Audio controls HP Remote Graphics Receiver Hostname 15 2 76 29 7 we About Microphone Button Click Disconnect Connect to enable and disable Setup Mode microphone input from Fa e the Local Computer to DU 4j O Advanced gt gt gt the Remote Computer audio playback volume control General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Clipboard Loggir Audio follows focus Speaker Button Click to Stereo enable and disable Quality Medium 22 KHz default w emote audio playback from the Remote Computer Low 11 KHz to the Local Computer Medium 22 KHz default High 44 KHz CO Quality The Speaker Button on the Receiver Control Panel enables and disables remote audio playback When remote audio playback is enabl
105. brings the Receiver Control Panel to the front if it is obscured by other windows N Minimizes iconities the Remote Display Window z C Closes the Remote Display Window which terminates the RGS connection If Setup Mode is activated by the hotkey sequence as opposed to the Setup Mode button and you have multiple Remote Display Windows on your computer you can bring up the Remote Display Window selection dialog to view a thumbnail image of each Remote Display Window see Selecting Remote Display Windows while in Directory Mode 6 5 1 Changing the Setup Mode hotkey sequence RGS allows you to change the Setup Mode hotkey sequence from its default value of Shift Down Space Down Space Up In defining a new Setup Mode hotkey sequence the following keys can be used e LCtrl RCtrl Ctrl Specifies a left right or side insensitive Ctrl key respectively e LAlt RAlt Alt Specifies a left right or side insensitive Alt key respectively Shift e Space Every sequence must begin with Ctrl Alt or Shift Two actions are associated with each key e Down Specifies a key press e Up Specifies a key release To change the hotkey sequence first press the Set button under the Hotkeys tab Then press and release the keys that you want to form the Setup Mode hotkey sequence The first key that you enter must be held down until you are done entering the other key s This is identical to the process of
106. cal build directory in the current directory localroot J configures builds and installs the required ALSA JACK libraries appropriate for the host system and active kernel It is a good choice for local installations or system development A system reboot is recommended for best results e remove This command removes and unconfigures an installation provided by the above install command e build rpms This command runs an install command first and then attempts to create a compatible set of binary RPMs for installation on matched system configurations This will greatly reduce the work of enterprise administrators duplicating this install process across multiple nodes After a successful build the following files are created RPMS rpms binary RPMs copied from usr src redhat RPMS RPMS RGS audio install sh customized install and configuration script to associate with RPMs ey NOTE The build log created by this script is located in var log hpaudio log E NOTE The sample installation script rgs_ audio support supports limited customization capabilities for newer source deliveries as they become available See the script internals for more details Installing RGS 70 3 2 4 Installing the Sender on Linux i IMPORTANT The Linux RGS Sender can only be installed on the computers and Linux operating systems shown in Figure 2 1 Installing the Sender on a non supported computer will prevent an RGS connection fr
107. ce code and licenses are re distributed with HP Remote Graphics Software Contents 1 Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software ll Typical RG SCO MMU NOI enea e a E E E A E E A E Ea 12 k2 RO andar and Re NE aa eee E TE E ATA ee E EE N O 13 EOE E E E ee E E E E E E E T E E E ee 14 l4 Addiional ROS fede Seress a N E 14 Eo RENEE 8 ol e ci 74 1 016 0 ea a E eee ees eee eee eee ee 15 t 6 eV al ele AP lechnical SUpPOL siccis ee en See ee ene ne ene ee en mene eer oe 15 1 6 1 Software Service Strategy for Non HP Hardware cccccccessescccccesseeeeceeeeeaeeeseeseseeaeeeeeeeeaaen ees 15 2 RGS overview 2 1 Supported computers and operating Systems xccescetancaesecanetneccensdanatieieeececss usa dadmonetesdoseeaccueneeacetuee 18 22 ROS veron NUMOS eap ee ete ee E E E T EN eee 19 DE RO ES er ces A E E E E ctcne eee 19 A R O E E E E EE E E E E N E E 20 2 5 Sender and Receiver interoperability 0 ssonnnnssnnnsssnnussssnessssrsssssersssrerrsssrrrssrrersserersssresssresseeeess 21 2o 2 ee 72 UO g gate ee nee nn ete eet mrt Pe en eee ne nc Re ee eer ere eer a ere S 21 DF NNNG INVOKING OO GN cere se ceca eee ecco cee E sence 21 2o COWS GTI OF 1D ONO ccc cers acres se eect acces A E soseansccasearoscesas 21 2 8 1 The Remote Computer frame Oi CN sets ceteae iscsi ee eens eatcegsecne cose eeeeace sos 21 2 8 2 netoa ee a 4 c el o serene en err ete E rer ner ST 22 2 8 3 IAG TO NS COMMS CIO tart cts oa cents eee ce nase t
108. ce to enter Setup Mode is Shift press space press space release When the Receiver detects this key sequence it does not send the key sequence to the Remote Computer instead the Receiver activates Setup Mode on the Local Computer as denoted by dimming of the Remote Display Window see Figure 5 4 15 2 76 96 15 2 76 96 Figure 5 4 Dimming of the Remote Display Window in Setup Mode The default hotkey sequence can be changed using the Hotkeys tab in the Receiver Control Panel see Section 6 5 Hotkeys As long as the Shift key is held down following the Shift press space press and space release hotkey sequence used to enter Setup Mode Setup Mode remains active When the Shift key is released Setup Mode exits In contrast the Setup Mode button on the Receiver Control Panel toggles the state of Setup Mode each time the user clicks on the button Using RGS 83 If Setup Mode is activated by the hotkey sequence as opposed to the Setup Mode button and you have multiple Remote Display Windows on your computer you can bring up the Remote Display Window selection dialog to view a thumbnail image of each Remote Display Window see Selecting Remote Display Windows while in Directory Mode Figure 5 5 Remote Display Window selection dialog The Remote Display Window selection dialog is only displayed in Directory Mode this is the mode that supports multiple Remote Display Window
109. ch as silent authentication as described in Section 5 3 1 Standard Login the Receiver will not prompt the local user for a domain username and password If the local user desires a prompt in order to enter an alternate domain username and password the user can check this box If checked the authentication dialog is always displayed when the Connect button is clicked This is advantageous on Sender Receiver pairs running Windows and Directory Mode with different connection needs for each session Enable global image updates When checked enabled all of the individual regions of the Remote Computer Sender frame buffer that have changed since the last update of the Remote Display Window are combined into a single update that encloses all of the regions that have changed The advantage of this approach is that there is no perceptible painting of the individual regions as can sometimes be observed when this option is disabled However the single rectangle can include a large number of pixels that have not changed since the last update and thus can significantly reduce the update rate Enabling this option may improve visual quality at the expense of performance Match receiver display resolution When checked the Receiver will negotiate with the Remote Computer Sender to have the Sender adjust its display resolution to match the Receiver display resolution If the Sender is unable to match the resolution of the Receiver a warning dialog
110. ck USB cable connections Verity that the USB device is physically connected to the Local Computer Check to see that it has power and is turned on Some devices may require that the user initiate an action before it connects For example Palm PDA devices require starting a HotSync operation for the device to connect and appear on the remote Sender system To further verify your connections recognized devices on the Receiver system appear in the Proc file system under the proc devices usb remote directory At least two files appear in this directory for a single connected device proc devices usb_remote devices File contains a list of recognized devices by the Receiver system e proc devices usb_remote If only one USB device is recognized the devices file will have a single entry 192 The file descriptor named 192 is the Remote USB device Dumping this file with cat 192 for example displays specific data about device 192 This should reflect the connected USB device If multiple devices are connected then each will have a file descriptor numbered consecutively starting at 192 Reset the USB device If the USB device has a reset button press the button If the device is in an incorrect state it may fail to connect Pressing the reset button may allow the device to connect Advanced capabilities 114 Enable Remote USB Verify that Remote USB is enabled under the USB option tab of the Receiver Control Panel see Figu
111. computer in a workgroup 2 User name 1 U 10 62 65 Administrator Password seeceeee Displayed on the Local Computer Displayed for the currently logged in user There are a number of variations of the Standard Login process as detailed in Section 5 3 1 Standard Login 2 10 Single Sign on and Easy Login RGS supports two additional login methods on certain Windows based Remote Computers These login methods are currently only supported on Windows XP sender platforms These two methods allow users to enter their credentials only once in connecting to a Remote Computer these methods are described below along with which authentication process is used e Single Sign on The RGS connection authentication process is used step 1 in Figure 2 10 and Figure 2 11 If authentication is successful the user will immediately see the Windows desktop session without needing to explicitly log into Windows or unlock the desktop Single Sign on is described further in Section 5 3 3 Single Sign on e Easy Login The user is pre connected to the system and standard Windows login screens are used to login to the desktop or unlock the screen If Windows authentication is successful the user will immediately see the desktop session without needing to be first authenticated by the RGS Receiver Sender Easy Login is described further in Section 5 3 2 Easy Login If neither Single Sign on nor Easy Login is selected the default Standard
112. connect to the same NIC that the RGS Sender is listening to This topic is expanded considerably in Section 4 3 below Linux Sender machine name and IP address The default on Linux is to bind the machine name to the following loopback interface in the etc hosts file 127 0 0 1 blade2 localhost localdomain The RGS Sender will not accept remote connections with this configuration Edit the etc hosts file and bind the machine name to its proper IP address as follows 127 0 0 1 localhost localhost localdomain 88 1 89 122 blade2 blade2 datacenter com User started X environments do not reliably support outside connections Users who manually start X desktops such as with startx from the console command line will find that outside access attempts may not properly connect or be authenticated This stems primarily from incomplete PAM session management and permissions to the console Users should avoid this condition and achieve login management through the display manager launched in init level 5 of the system Microsoft Windows APIPA Automatic Private IP Addressing APIPA can cause the RGS Sender to open sockets on private IP addresses This can occur for example if the Sender computer is unable to connect to a DHCP server Because the private IP addresses are not visible to the RGS Receiver RGS connections will not work You can verify if the Sender is using private IP addresses by typing the following in a command window nets
113. connection is terminated RGS properties 145 Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverPhysicalDisplaysEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverPhysicalDisplaysEnabled IsMutable bool l If the following conditions are met 1 This property is enabled 2 Rgreceiver lsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled is enabled see previous property 3 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay lsPreferredResolutionEnabled is disabled Then the Receiver will try to set the layout of the Remote Computer Sender physical displays to have the same display layout and resolution as the Receiver displays If the Sender is unable to match the layout and resolution of the Receiver physical displays the Receiver will try to just match the Receiver display resolution For example if the Receiver has two physical displays in a 1x2 layout and a overall virtual display resolution of 2560x1024 1280x1024x2 the Receiver will try to set the Sender to the same layout and resolution If that fails the Receiver will try to set a single physical display resolution of 2560x1024 If that fails an error is reported If the following conditions are met 1 This property is enabled 2 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay lsPreterredResolutionEnabled is enabled E NOTE As noted earlier Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay IsPreferredResolutionEnabled takes precedence over Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled Therefore if the former property is enabled
114. connections and applications that use the JACK interface Note that the install sh command run in step 4 of the receiver install will build jack This section is only necessary if a custom build of alsa or jack is needed For reliable audio support with the Receiver for Linux the bundled versions of the ALSA sound libraries and JACK Audio Connection Kit software must be built and installed Versions of ALSA prior to the version provided with the installer may yield unsupportable results Removal of these previous versions is advised prior to reinstallation of ALSA software If multiple audio devices are installed in a system administrators should identify the target audio system prior to installing the included ALSA software Properly configured kernel headers for the running kernel must be available from the directory lib modules lt version gt build for proper installation The example installation script provided only builds installs for the currently active kernel The installation and configuration scripts require administrator privileges on the target system If you cannot become root on your system ask an administrator for assistance Once ALSA and JACK are installed and correctly configured you are ready to use remote audio with the RGS Receiver for Linux Audio Requirements For reliable audio support with the Receiver for Linux the bundled version of the JACK Audio Connection Kit software must be built and installed ALSA sound lib
115. cted network cable To deal with such network issues the Receiver and Sender support network timeout mechanisms to provide notification to the user of network issues Advanced capabilities 118 Receiver network timeouts RGS provides two user settable Receiver timeout properties to allow you to optimize RGS for your particular network conditions such as low bandwidth or high latency conditions These properties allow you to specity timeout values that if exceeded will cause the RGS Receiver to take specific actions such as displaying a warning dialog or closing the RGS connection The two Receiver timeout properties are e Receiver warning timeout property It this value is exceeded the Receiver displays a network connection warning e Receiver error timeout property If this value is exceeded the Receiver closes the connection The Receiver error and warning timeout properties can be set in the Receiver Control Panel see Figure 6 21 and are specified in seconds The Receiver timeout properties can also be set in the rgreceiverconfig file or ona command line in both of these cases the timeout properties are specified in milliseconds Figure 6 21 shows the default Receiver timeout periods and the corresponding timeout properties Figure 6 21 Receiver Control Panel HP Remote Graphics Receiver Hostname General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Logging Statistics Timeouts seconds Enor a0 a Rgreceiver Network Timeou
116. ctivity The Windows Sender on some laptops has exhibited inconsistent performance Increasing the Sender priority to high usually improves interactivity in this case This provides the Sender more frequent access to the CPU and improves the update frequency to the Receiver Process priority for the Sender is command line accessible for the Windows Sender Four command line options are available belownormal normal abovenormal high Priorities Low and realtime cannot be selected for the Windows Sender There are two ways to set the process priority of the Windows Sender e Use regedit to modify the rgsender service start up parameters in the Windows Registry see the regedit instructions in the Starting the Sender on Windows section e Use HP Performance Tuning Framework PTF to configure Windows Sender priority available only on HP Workstations CAUTION Adjusting the process priority of the Sender to a level higher than normal can cause other normally privileged processes to receive fewer CPU cycles than normal Therefore caution should be observed in adjusting the priority of the Sender Setting the Sender process priority using PTF The HP Performance Tuning Framework PTF can be used adjust the priority of the Sender without having to use regedit PTF is available for HP Workstations only from this location www hp com workstations software framework index html See the PTF help and documentation for further infor
117. d This sound is not heard on the Receiver because it is played through the PC Speaker See the section PC speaker sounds not working above No audio with multiple audio devices The Sender will open up the device that is registered as the default audio device The Sender is a service that is running in a different context If you have multiple audio devices it may choose a different device than you have selected as the default Disable the extra audio device to ensure the Sender uses the correct device See the Windows Sender Audio Installation section to set up the audio device after disabling the extra audio device Advanced capabilities 105 6 3 Remote USB operation For an overview of remote USB see Section 2 16 Remote USB overview This section provides an example of using remote USB A USB drive key is plugged into the Local Computer and remote USB is used to attach the drive key to a Remote Computer This example assumes the Receiver was installed with the remote USB configuration option shown in Figure 6 12 For a discussion of the USB installation options see Section 3 1 1 Installing the Receiver on Windows Figure 6 12 USB configuration during Receiver installation USB devices are Local or Remote F HP Remote Graphics Receiver InstallShield Wizard Remote USB Configuration How do you vash to configure Remote USB USB devices are Local Advanced capabilities 106 6 3 1 Attaching a local U
118. d library hprgina dll enables Single Sign on The file hprgina d11 is a GINA Graphical Identification and Authentication module that is loaded by the Windows WinLogon exe process There are three ways to install hprgina dl11 and therefore enable RGS Single Sign on 1 Enabling Single Sign on during installation Single Sign on can be enabled during RGS Sender installation enabling Single Sign on installs the hprgina dl1l module This is the preferred method to enable Single Sign on The default during installation is to not enable Single Sign on The administrator must answer two questions to enable Single Sign on see Figure 3 12 If Single Sign on is enabled the computer must be restarted before Single Sign on is operational Figure 3 12 The dialog presented during Sender installation to enable Single Sign on or Easy Login Remote Graphics Sender InstallShield Wizard Single Sign On Easy Login Configuration Do you wish to enable Single Sign On or Easy Login Enable Single Sign On Enable Easy Login Do not enable either al UF install Sil lt Back Next M cancel Installing RGS 60 2 Using the rgadmin tool to enable Single Sign on i IMPORTANT The rgadmin tool is only installed and supported on Windows XP The rgadmin tool can be used to enable Single Sign on check the Enable Single Sign on radio button in Figure 3 13 and click Apply Enabling Single Sign on installs the hprgina d11 module Using the rga
119. d the HP Remote Audio virtual device and make it the default playback device However HP Remote Microphone will also be displayed in the drop down menu Ensure that HP Remote Audio default is selected not HP Remote Microphone Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Volume Sounds Audio Voice Hardware Sound playback J Default device 7 1 NVIDIA R nForce TM Audio v NVIDIAIR nForcelT M Audio a ee Remote Microphone If the Remote Computer has an audio device installed it will be the default playback device However HP Remote Microphone will also be displayed in the drop down menu Ensure that the audio device default is selected not HP Remote Microphone NOTE Remote Microphone can be enabled disabled using the Rgsender Mic IsEnabled property as described in Section 9 5 3 Microphone property group Advanced capabilities 99 The HP Remote Audio device has only the mixer available in the recording control panel and the volume level for this line cannot be adjusted If an audio device is detected during installation an attempt is made to select the mixer as the recorder input Due to wide variations in naming and volume levels it is likely that the mixer line will need to be selected by hand To select the mixer as the input line click the Volume button in the Sound recording section of Figure 6 3 This brings up the Recording Control window see Figure 6 5 Many audio device drivers do not show all ava
120. der Installshield Wizard Remote Graphics Sender Configuration Fase selecti thee apane San Faa ike bo enable im the Aeenote Graphics Serdar et Enable Feneote USB I Enable Remotes Microphone EJ Enable Remote Cipboard We m onci sure wari moe miomation Install eld Advanced capabilities 116 USB device drivers and program support Verify that the device drivers and programs required by the device are installed and available on the Sender system Many USB devices require manufacturer supplied software to work on a system This software must offen be installed before the USB device is connected to the system Advanced capabilities 117 6 4 Adjusting Network timeout settings The options available under the Network tab in the Receiver Control Panel are shown in Figure 6 20 Figure 6 20 Options available under the Network tab General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Logging Statistics Timeouts seconds 4 Error 30 Warming z Dialog 15 Ik Note Must be disconnected to adjust timeouts RGS supports three classes of user settable timeouts 1 Receiver network timeout properties After the Receiver has established a connection to the Sender the Sender transmits sync pulses consisting of network messages to the Receiver every second to permit the Receiver to determine connection integrity If the Receiver fails to detect the sync pulses the Receiver compares the time since the last sync pulse
121. der property groups RGS supports the following groups of Sender properties e General properties group e Rgsender IsRdpLogoutDetectionEnabled e Rgsender IsCopyRegionEnabled e Rgsender IsRegionLimitEnabled e Rgsender IsDisconnectOnLogoutEnabled e Rgsender MaxImageUpdateRate e Rgsender IsSnapToCodecEnabled e Rgsender IsBlankScreenAndBlockInputEnabled e Rgsender IsIloRemoteConsoleEnabled e Rgsender IsAnonymousConnectionForceEnabled e Rgsender PreferredDisplayMethods e Rgsender IsCollaborationNotificationEnabled e Rgsender IsReconnectOnConsoleDisconnectEnabled e Microphone properties group e Rgsender Mic IsEnabled Network timeout property group e Rgsender Network Timeout Error e Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog RGS properties 157 e USB access control list properties group e Rgsender Usb Acl RulesetPath e Rgsender Usb Acl SchemaPath e Rgsender Usb Acl RulesetErrorTimeout e NIC binding properties group e Rgsender Network IsListenOnAllInterfacesEnabled e Rgsender Network Interface n IsEnabled e Rgsender Network AllowIpAddressSubnet e Rgsender Network Port Clipboard property group e Rgsender Clipboard IsEnabled 8 6 2 Sender general properties Rgsender IsRdpLogoutDetectionEnabled bool 1 This property only applies to the Windows versions of the RGS Sender When a user disconnects from a Remote Desktop Protocol RDP session the Windows desktop on the Remote Computer is immediately available for an R
122. dmin tool to enable Single Sign on is preferred over the manual method described next Figure 3 13 Using the rgadmin tool to enable Single Sign on RGS Admin Tool 3D Updates GINA Setup Single Sign on Easy Login Setup AGS Single Sign on and AGS Easy Login enables fewer authentication steps to login to or unlock a user s remote desktop The AGS GINA module named hprgina dll can be configured to enable Single Sign on or Easy Login See the HP Remote Graphics Software Users Guide for more details readmin l Erina ES E i Single Sign on has been enabled Enable Easy Login D Please restart your system For Single Sign on to take effect Enable Single Sign on Disable Single Sign on and Easy Login 3 Manually enabling Single Sign on Although the manual method is not the preferred method to enable Single Sign on it is provided so that administrators will know exactly what parts of the operating system are being moditied To manually enable Single Sign on perform the following steps 1 Install the Sender on the HP workstation If the RGS Sender is not installed or installs with errors do not perform the remaining steps Doing so will put the computer in a state that requires a complete re installation of the operating system After the RGS Sender is installed confirm that hprgina d11 exists in the C WINDOWS system32 directory The Sender installer copies hprgina d11 direct
123. dows The Sender mouse movement of interest is enabled when the Snap To box is checked in the Mouse Properties Pointer Options dialog on the Sender computer see Figure 8 7 Checking of the Snap To box causes the Sender mouse pointer to be automatically moved to the default button in a dialog box Figure 8 7 Pointer Options tab in the Sender Mouse Properties dialog Mouse Properties a Buttons Pointers Pointer Options Wheel Hardware Motion E Select a pointer speed Slow J Enhance pointer precision Snap To Automatically move pointer to the default button in a nN dialog box Visibility N S Display pointer trails Short J Long be Hide pointer while typing C Show location of pointer when press the CTRL key When the Rgreceiver IsMouseSyncEnabled property is set to 1 on the Receiver and when an automatic snap to action occurs on the Sender the snap to action will be communicated from the Sender to the Receiver the RGS Receiver will then move the mouse cursor to reflect the cursor position in the Sender dialog box where the snap to action occurred If this property is set to O snap to actions on the Sender will not be reflected on the Receiver This features requires that both the RGS Sender and Receiver be version 5 2 5 or later This feature is supported only on Sender computers running Windows while the Receiver computer can be running either Windows or Linux 8 5 4 Receiver browser properties Rgreceive
124. duct ID is the 4 hex digits after Pid_ The Revision is the 4 hex digits after Rev_ For example an iPod has a Hardware Ids property that looks like this USB Vid 05ac amp Pid 120a amp Rev 0001 This gives us the following values iPod Vendor ID 0x05AC iPod Product ID 0x120A iPod Revision 0x0001 e Compatible Ids property This property shows the class code subclass code and protocol code for the device The class code is the 2 hex digits after Class_ The subclass code is the 2 hex digits after the SubClass_ The protocol code is the 2 hex digits after the Prot For example an iPod has a Compatible Ids property that looks like this USB Class 08 amp SubClass 06 amp Prot_ 50 This gives us the following values iPod Class Code 08 Mass Storage Device iPod Subclass Code 06 SCSI transparent command set 1Pod Protocol Code 50 Bulk only transport Determining USB device information for Linux An open source program called usbview is available on the SourceForge web site There are three different programs called usbview The one to use is the original version This is the plain usbview that was registered on 1999 12 20 and is administered by kroah Do not use usbview2 or usbview 1 8 The URL for this software is sourceforge net projects usbview Verifying the USB data Once a device has been identified using one of the previous methods you should verify that the correct device was used Thi
125. e Lawrence F Spence ii eee cme aed a Number 14428912498 ee ar Tame to send Date to send 20 47 58 07 718 Remote Display Window 2 Remote Computer 2 Local Computer Cut and paste are supported in the following scenarios Between a Local Window and a Remote Display Window in both directions The Remote Computer may be running Windows or Linux The Local Computer must be running Windows Between two Remote Display Windows in both directions In this case the Local Computer can be running either Windows or Linux the Remote Computers may be running Windows or Linux i IMPORTANT Not all data formats can be transferred using cut and paste between Windows applications See Section 6 6 Remote Clipboard operation for detailed information on the supported formats RGS overview 42 In order for Remote Clipboard to be usable it must be enabled during both the Sender and Receiver installations on Microsoft Windows see Figure 2 26 See Manual installation of the Receiver on Windows and Manual installation of the Sender on Windows for further information on Remote Clipboard installation Figure 2 26 Enabling Remote Clipboard during Sender and Receiver installation on Microsoft Windows systems Remote Graphics Sender InstallShield Wizard Remote Graphics Receiver InstallShield Wizard Remote Graphics Sender Configuration Remote Clipboard Configuration Please select the
126. e usb present TRUE This parameter causes ESX to materialize a USB hardware device for the virtual machine use This is required to support remote USB functionality for RGS This value can only be set by directly editing the vmx file of the virtual machine This value is not propagated by Virtual Center clone or template operations The placement of this variable in the vmx file is critical for proper operation and should be placed before the extendedConfigFile parameter which is near the beginning of the file Ef NOTE If you re using the VMware View USB implementation the above parameter is not needed Svga maxHeight lt max screen height in pixels gt This parameter tells the VMware virtual VGA device driver the maximum height of screen to support This value may be set by GUI or by directly editing the vmx file of the virtual machine Svga maxWidth lt max screen width in pixels gt This parameter tells the VMware virtual VGA device driver the maximum width of screen to support This value may be set by GUI or by directly editing the vmx file of the virtual machine Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 186 Svga vramSize lt size in bytes of the VGA screen buffer gt This parameter tells the VMware virtual VGA device driver the size of screen buffer to use This value may only be set by directly editing the vmx file of the virtual machine and is not propagated by clone and template operations The default maximum screen r
127. e Recovery Settings This section discusses restart options for the RGS Sender and possible interactions of the agent with the Sender By default most Windows services are installed without any automatic restart recovery settings This means that when a service terminates Windows will by default not restart the service unless explicitly set When RGS Sender software is first installed it is installed with the Windows default do not restart Restarting the RGS Sender service can support RGS reconnection with a RGS Receiver client unless a system error prevents the RGS service from restarting In designing the agent you should consider whether or not to check for the existence of a running RGS Sender service as an indication of a sufficient primary user connection If service restarts are programmed for your environment this test may be unnecessary To set the RGS Sender service for automatic restart adjust its Recovery Property through the Administrative Tools and Services control panel options Actions to take for the first failure second failure and subsequent failures are available in the properties menu see Figure 10 1 The Recovery options include e Take No Action e Restart the Service e Runa Program e Restart the Computer Remote Application Termination 174 Figure 10 1 Remote Computer Sender recovery options Remote Graphics Sender Properties Local Computer 7 l General Select the comp
128. e appears on the user s desktop The persistent Sender Monitor is Viewable popup can be removed by editing the rgsenderconfig file in the RGS Sender directory This can be done by un commenting the following line and setting it as shown Rgsender IsBlankScreenAndBlockInputEnabled 0 A 6 RGS operating modes available with VDI Both RGS operating modes can be used in establishing a connection from a client computer to a virtual desktop session Normal Mode e Directory Mode A 7 Using HP Session Allocation Manager with HP VDI HP Session Allocation Manager SAM 2 1 or later can be used to manage RGS connections from client computers to virtual desktop sessions provided that the HP SAM Registration Service is installed within the virtual desktop For information on SAM visit www hp com go sam Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 189 Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS i IMPORTANT Prior to RGS 5 2 0 this list of USB devices was maintained in a separate document available at www hp com support rgs_manuals titled USB Devices Supported by Remote Graphics Software The list itself was an Excel spreadsheet with an internal description of Client attached USB Devices Accessible by the RGS Sender Beginning at RGS 5 2 0 the supported USB devices are now listed in this appendix which supersedes the separate USB supported devices document This appendix lists the clientattached USB devices that can be accessed by the
129. e called Libpam_custom 1 you may need to edit the PAM configuration file etc pam d rgsender to specify the PAM authentication module to be used by the RGS Sender For example you may need to add the following line to the file etc pam d rgsender auth optional lib security pam_ custom 1 The RGS Sender will not accept remote connections when a DNS name inquiry does not resolve to a valid active IP address the Sender expects to fully resolve the machine name to an active network connection IP To test this the command hostname i should report an active IP address for the qualified hostname Failure to resolve this address from a qualified hostname may result in remote connection errors One way to address the hostname IP name resolution is to edit the etc hosts file and bind the machine name to its proper IP address as follows 127 0 0 1 localhost localhost localdomain 88 1 89 122 blade2 blade2 datacenter com If the Sender is being installed on the HP ProLiant Blade Workstation the blade workstation needs to be rebooted into User Mode after Sender installation is complete For information on selecting User Mode refer to the document Administrator s Guide for Linux on HP Proliant Blade Workstations available at www hp com support xw460c_manuals Installing RGS 72 Starting the Sender on Linux The Linux sender is started by the rge X server extension whose configuration is described in the previous section The
130. e ne eee emer ere E ne ret E eee een Ce eee ee 93 5 5 1 Creating amp collaborahon SESSION x tags ce cost arr ranie E O A Ea 93 5 5 2 Collaboration MONI CANON dialog ergy pas hose tract teat sesnecsdartantentanacune secs EEES rS 94 6 Advanced capabilities od MEE C2132 0 hfe 9 10 ean ee ne ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee rere 97 G kenob audo on TA Oee ee Cen ae ener eee een eee eee tenn eer eee eee eee tern ere eee 98 6 2 1 Configuring audio on the Microsoft Windows XP Professional Sender cccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 98 6 2 2 Calibrating audio on the Microsoft Windows XP Professional Sender ccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 101 6 2 3 Disabling a dio on ihe SENOS ssancrersar onarri aT a E 103 6 2 4 Ung GUC e E E A E A eanmeene 104 6 2 5 Poleni araua o I Ue i a E E EEA E E EE 105 OG Remote USB operadlo sptcsserrastn dase satie toscen a e n E RA EEE E ekasresnieestees 106 6 3 1 Attaching a local USB device to a Remote Computer cccccccseecccecseeeeeeesseeceeesaeseeseeaeeeeeeas 107 6 3 2 US o Refers Colac 6la a c e a en one ee Ce ne E ere ee eee ree ee en 109 6 3 3 Auto remoting of USB devices cccccccccseeccccece es eeeeeeee eee eeeeeeee see eeeeeeeeee ee eeeeeesseeeeeeeeeaaeneeeees 109 6 3 4 Supported remote USB devices cccccccceeecccee ee eeeeee ee eeeeee es eeeeeee ae eeeeeesaeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeegsaeeees 110 6 3 5 Remote USB Access Control Lists cssacesecceanvateeaoenentdacanestuwende niduSsansabgesa
131. e options 3 Locate the RGS Sender configuration file rgsenderconfig at C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender Right click on the file and remove the Read Only property 4 Edit the rgsenderconfig file by un commenting and modifying the following lines to have values of O Rgsender IsBlankScreenAndBlockInputEnabled 0 Rgsender IsCollaborationNotificationEnabled 0 Please see Section A 5 for further details ee IMPORTANT Ensure that you remove the from all lines you wish to activate in the rgsenderconfig file 5 Save the rgsenderconfig file Restart the RGS Sender or the Sender computer in order to have the new configuration file settings take effect A 3 3 Install View Agent on View Master Parent VM The VMware View Agent must be installed after RGS is installed 1 Launch the View Agent install executable 2 Install according to View Agent installation instructions A 3 4 Install the RGS Receiver and View Client on the client computers i IMPORTANT The RGS Receiver must be installed prior to installing the View Client 1 Launch the RGS Receiver install executable and accept the Receiver installation defaults 2 You may make changes to the RGS Receiver configuration file rgreceiverconfig Please see Section 8 2 Setting property values in a configuration file for more information Optional To allow RGS to automatically detect your client screen resolution follow this procedu
132. e to log into the Remote Computer 4 To prevent this situation the user should log out from the RDC session prior to leaving home 5 To address this situation if it occurs the user can do one of the following e Contact IT and have an administrator log into the Remote Computer with RGS which will terminate the RDC connection After the administrator disconnects the RGS connection the user can establish an RGS connection using the smartcard reader e Reboot the Remote Computer e Return home and log out from the RDC session f NOTE Unlike RDC a user can leave a home RGS login session active and then log in from work with RGS The smartcard reader will operate correctly in both situations and the work RGS login session will replace the home login session However before departing for work the user must disconnect the RGS connection If the home RGS connection is left active Easy Login will not work from work and the user will be required to perform steps similar to the steps in paragraph 5 to be able to log in from work RGS overview 34 2 16 5 Computers supporting remote USB Remote USB connections are supported by the computers and operating systems shown in Figure 2 21 Figure 2 21 Contigurations supporting remote USB Receiver Remote USB Windows Windows XP Professional SP1 SP2 Windows Vista Business Ultimate and Embedded Support Matrix XPe WES SP3 32 BIT X64 Enterprise 32 bit 64 bit Personal Workstations Mobile Worksta
133. ea eee etna sera ee cnteeecone ese eseecug ered caansensed 24 2 8 4 ONE AGMGNY conme hoN 2 13 55 rock sneetccinstcrmeeincnsinascmeersane dana E AE 24 2 9 Establishing an RGS connection using Standard LOGIN ccccccceecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeeeseesseeeeesseeeeeeaaeeees 25 2 10 Single 9 TON CINE Easy LOGIN access anane A E E 26 2 11 koo opaan MON E eee een ee a ener nner me eee ne ne eee nee eee eee 27 2 12 NUIT MONO ONPG ONCNON S 4sea csasens cee sate nae E cena a aumenennacaas A 28 2 13 Remote Computer monitor blanking overview ccccccseeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeaas 29 2 14 Video avel iy I IOo E ae ene eee ene ee ree eee et een ere nea ere ee ee ere ree 29 2 15 PSU syarscen te asa sein cpGevnnceinsd enteateaistoneameadapdeds acute cieseaaned dace qunestiaqbatenestinest eine RET Sepeenies 30 2 16 Remote USB 10S owas ctic atv nec caittstenpnanesaiaswetacta pon ieane isesaso anon ey mre ie eetgonoeestamnereitaasons caus 3 2 16 11 WS BSS SSS Wil COMING ss crerinnsnn2cnSesacrte etd sedce sine one gts aid eicesnesaistwiaesnedsaedeesabotewuekootesceueaseeueldanteades 31 2 16 2 Isochronous USB SU ODOM cenistccosseanccende lt tdatsoneeeineddasddatoetesiuibuSessseabasecctaeanebeaseanvetuwasebebbeioaneices 3 2 16 3 Install time configuration of remote USB ccccccccccceseeeeececeeeee cease eeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaen ees 32 2 16 4 Unique smartcard handling sees sc 0 cics chesegarsuccersatenddeeasenechubadenddson
134. ed the Sender records and transmits audio to the Receiver for playback Audio controls in the Receiver Control Panel allow you set the audio volume quality and stereo mono format Note that audio quality and stereo settings will affect your overall network usage higher quality audio and stereo usage will increase the network traffic The Microphone Button on the Receiver Control Panel enables and disables remote microphone When remote microphone is enabled microphone input from the Local Computer is sent to the Remote Computer for capture by the Remote Computer application Er NOTE The audio controls in the Receiver Control Panel can be set by using Receiver audio properties See Section 8 5 5 Receiver audio properties The options available under the Audio tab are e Audio follows focus This checkbox determines how audio is handled when the Receiver is connected to multiple Remote Computers Checking this box enables playback of the audio stream from the Remote Computer whose Remote Display Window currently has the keyboard focus When unchecked the Receiver combines the audio from all Remote Computers into a single audio stream If multiple Receivers are executing the audio is combined from all Receivers into a single audio stream e Stereo This checkbox enables or disables stereo audio Stereo audio sends independent audio streams for the left and right channels but at the expense of greater network bandwidth utilization If
135. edantecctanse ccceeunteeatenncosecaumneeaiaee 45 2 23 RGS Se GU iy TOC ONS arene cceastecascnnveueseadsssaeeeencsccessausaseannnreeeeuatasasnessueesssnimeceanensteeceeeaacsees 46 3 Installing RGS 3I Installing RG SGV NGG WS cates sa ciae ct ce sates scceccenndentenascactecpasecesanasteniaasaecdna vast iiia aiaia 47 3 1 1 Installing the Receiver on Windows ss csessncussensiceccawadsussonmsaeeacecononaeeseanncinondangeesgrentseaaeeteenesseens 47 3 1 2 Installing the Sender on Windows scccccccdoiscataenascscaagndecatnepeaecdecdeaseatanncaouenedecesenpediereedadesnaretar 52 32 nsialing RGS on NO ares ce cesses tps esennneesesaeeoeqeaesecaneecshies equa sneeeeces oxcarsactaaneesensaeunenoseeeeceaeasaee 68 3 2 1 Installing the Receiver on LINUX acccionacstecetnsdctceoacteuiesaadeateseatecctsenstuatanaotuacaummeecenessenecetenatearend 68 Contents 4 3 2 2 Uninstalling the Receiver on WAU oscciezcesccatie ss adateceaweacahiaesadenasselnaceleedendenadiseecetaeceadeteseatcesdaeee 69 3 2 3 Installing audio on the Linux RECEIVER scones couescesrncncddsindasaedeasineduelennnetserscusedaetennedeasmutiend teeceo sien 69 3 2 4 sti lI iate fe ihe Sender om Bl ta lt keer ame ame te near nC nN Sener nec ne mn oe ee re 71 4 Pre connection checklist Al Local Computer Receiver checklist 55 ecusscenctencsasonssssessadewsan E TEEN 74 42 R m le Compuler Sender NSCS aie scccuenc aceaercecnseutrsechaoe oe I RE ANEO r EE eaei Epi 74 AS NIC PGMS Ol INS SNS cs sctecate
136. eeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeaas 185 A 2 3 Installing the RGS Sender on the virtual machine ccccceeeeccceeseececeeseeeceeesseeeeceseeeeeeseaeeeeeesaeeess 187 A 3 Using RGS with dynamic HP VDI based on VMware View ssssusssssunssssenssssunsssrrnssrrrssrrrressrresssrens 187 Pee Credie anew virudi machine acces career cies nape ieeaee antec an n na S aa AS 188 A 3 2 Install the RGS Sender on View Master Parent VM and modify the configuration file to optimize for VMware View environment sssssssssessesseesttseessrssrstesttsttsttsttsststtsttsttstesttsttstesttseeseeseesseeseeee 188 A 3 3 Install View Agent on View Master Parent VM cccccccecseeecceceeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeaas 188 A 3 4 Install the RGS Receiver and View Client on the client computers ccccccceeecececeeeeeceesseeeeeesseeeees 188 Po OIG RO CNG OSHS oe terete caretacennss sc ea E E A E 189 AS Disabling the RGS warming POPUD kee eam nen nent neie cee aN ence ts tert nn tne vee en cee eee 189 A 6 RGS operating modes available with VDI casecnenieie ced edaaceadsceavisledcaceesiaciendsScexnesacaedosst bcenosecestensstzccs 189 A 7 Using HP Session Allocation Manager with HP VDI ic seciesineecediostececsa bacon oid svacecte Ueceeetavecdexedvesdaxeudeesees 189 Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS Appendix C Linux remote audio device support Contents 7 Figures Figure l l Typical ROS c nhiguralOn tra case pees ete ee eset wae
137. eeeeeeessaeeeeeseeaaee ees 149 Figure 8 7 Pointer Options tab in the Sender Mouse Properties dialog cccccccsseeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaa ees 150 Fig re 8 8 Sender properties hierarchy rreren iioo an E EE E caceeuiess eens ENE Sa 157 Figure 7a THe PIP Remi EAO an E A A E E EE 163 Figure S 2 Event Properios VMN ace ecetyseecasica ra ace E E O TA E 164 Figure 9 3 Reporting of the Local Computer IP address port number and hostname when a connection is made to the e E EE EEEE E E T N E A E A E E O TEE EE A T 165 Figure 9 4 MSDN event logging information srenccegevaceacetnsnrsgevene ce aes segevnn aceon vsausenvece gone aden aavenent seniee 166 Figure 10 1 Remote Computer Sender recovery Options sicsc bce scececdeenysieadecnevacdicennccnsaacivaceeveanecdicacaresecatesetaaces 175 Tables Table 21 Winaows RGS GOSS pains areata as sates er patsce era Ea e Tr Ee 36 Tapie 22 linux ROS dudic dda paih et Tsn a E E E oe ee 38 Table 10 1 RGS Sender events logged in the HPRemote log ccccceccccceeseeceeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeesaeeeeeeaaees 167 Table 12 1 Potential RGS issues and troubleshooting suggestions ccccceeccccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeesseeeeeeganes 179 Table A 1 VMware ESX versions that support RGS iacge cdekeewsdes act nectceieesdaesdseaaanevireuaselwreeatceiueeuadeasexestodnectaciees 183 Table A 2 VMware View versions that support RGS s sssssnunsssnnnsssnesssssersssrnrssrrresssrirssrrrnsssrers
138. eiver timeout properties For legacy reasons the Sender begins by using the maximum of the Rgsender Network Timeout Error property and the Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog property see Section 6 4 2 Dialog timeouts When the Receiver negotiates its connection to the Sender it notifies the Sender of its error timeout property For sync pulse timeout purposes the Sender adopts the minimum of Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error AND the maximum of Rgsender Network Timeout Error AND Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog For example if the Sender error timeout property is 30 seconds and the Receiver error timeout property is 20 seconds the Sender will use 20 seconds for its sync pulse timeout because 20 seconds is the minimum of both If the user adjusts the Receiver error timeout property to 60 seconds the Sender will use a value of 30 seconds for sync pulse timeout because again 30 seconds is the minimum of both error timeouts If a Sender sync pulse timeout occurs the Sender will terminate its connection to the Receiver Unlike the Receiver which displays warning and error messages the Sender does not display a message prior to terminating the connection The user must initiate a reconnection from the Receiver to the Sender to restore connectivity A relatively small Sender error timeout property is recommended If the Receiver and Sender connectivity is impacted by a network disruption the Sender could take as long as its error time
139. emote Computer Note that in addition to sending the first key to the Remote Computer the key sequence is still processed by the Local Computer Key Repeat When using a hotkey sequence such as Shift Down Space Down Space Up Windows injects repeating shift down events in response to the Shift key being held down By default the Receiver ignores these key repeats Processing of key repeats can be enabled by checking this box if it s required for your applications Note that if Key Repeat is enabled the sequence shift down shift down space down space up will not trigger Setup Mode so the sequence must be typed faster if this setting is enabled Advanced capabilities 124 e Setup Mode Hotkey The text dialog and the Set and Reset buttons allow you to redefine the Setup Mode hotkey sequence from its default value As shown in the Receiver Control Panel of Figure 6 23 the default hotkey sequence to activate Setup Mode is Press and hold down the Shift key At the same time press then release the space bar this activates Setup Mode You will remain in Setup Mode until you release the Shift key e Additional hotkeys The following hotkeys are also supported these hotkeys can be entered as either upper case or lower case H Toggles the Remote Display Window Toolbar on and off see Section 5 1 3 Remote Display Window Toolbar a M Restores the Receiver Control Panel if it has been minimized iconified Also
140. emote Computer doesn t have an audio device installed RGS will automatically load the HP Remote Audio virtual device as described in Audio Playback device selection below therefore HP Remote Audio will be listed in the pull down menu To enable remote microphone ensure that HP Remote Microphone default is selected not HP Remote Audio Sound recording Microphone Default device device 4 selection HP Remote Audio HP Remote Microphone RGS Audio Player HP Remote Microphone virtual device Remote or Computer Application Sender Loaded if no audio device HP Remote Audio virtual device audio device Ay If the Remote Computer has an audio device installed it will be the default Sound recording device To enable RGS remote microphone select HP Remote Microphone instead Sound recording Default device HP Remote Microphone NVIDIA R nForcefT M Audio HP Remote Microphone Data path for microphone input from the Local Computer mat Installed in HP Personal Workstations not installed in blade workstations Data path for audio playback on the Local Computer is installed RGS Audio Recorder Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Au d i O Volume Sounds Audio Voice Hardware playback Sound playback device Default device selection i HP Remote Audio HP Remote Microphone If the Remote Computer doesn t have an audio device installed RGS will automatically loa
141. en the RGS Receiver detects a network disruption The warning color is a four byte number with each byte providing the following information e alpha byte specifies the transparency value of the warning color that overlays the Remote Display Window e red byte specifies the red component of the warning color e green byte specifies the green component of the warning color e blue byte specifies the blue component of the warning color An alpha value of 0x00 will be totally transparent meaning that no warning color will be visible to the user An alpha value of OxFF will be totally opaque completely covering the image in the Remote Display Window with the warning color The default value of the warning color is 0x80b40000 representing the following e The alpha component is 0x80 128 decimal This is 50 transparent e The red component is Oxb4 180 decimal This is about 70 of full red OxFF e The green component is 0x00 There is no green component e The blue component is 0x00 There is no blue component Ef NOTE The following property while supported has been deprecated HP recommends that the subsequent properties Rgreceiver IsGlobalImageUpdateEnabled and its associated IsMutable property be used instead Rgreceiver IsGlobalImageUpdateMutable bool 1 If set to 1 the user will be able to modify the Enable global image updates check box in the Receiver Control Panel If set to O the user will be unable to
142. en the cut occurs when the paste occurs Local Computer Application Remote Computer Application Remote Computer UW7Prowv 6ro C L I P B O A R D Local Computer The above demonstrates delayed rendering Instead of transferring data from the Remote Computer to the Local Computer when the cut occurs the data transfer is delayed until the paste occurs This reduces network traffic by eliminating unnecessary data transfers Doing a cut and paste in the other direction from the Local Window to the Remote Display Windows works in the same manner the data that is cut is held in the clipboard on the Local Computer until the paste occurs on the Remote Computer at which time the clipboard data is transferred to the Remote Computer Advanced capabilities 127 As we ve seen the terms Remote Computer and Local Computer have very specific meanings in the context of RGS In the context of Remote Clipboard however we use terms that are centric to each computer involved in a Remote Clipboard operation If a cut and paste is being performed from Computer A to Computer B Computer A will refer to itself for example in the DEBUG LOG as the local computer while referring to Computer B as the remote computer This is independent of which computer is the actual Local Computer or Remote Computer from an RGS connection perspective Continuing with the example of a cut and paste from Computer A to Computer B Computer
143. ench German Japanese Norwegian Swedish United Kingdom U S English Belgian French Canadian French Chinese Simplified US Keyboard Chinese Traditional US Keyboard Czech Czech QWERTY Danish Dutch Finnish French German Italian Japanese Korean Latin American Norwegian Portuguese Portuguese Brazilian ABNT Russian Spanish Swedish Swiss French Swiss German Turkish Q United Kingdom United Kingdom Extended United States International US RGS overview 45 2 23 RGS security features Because of the distributed nature of an RGS connection providing connection security is critically important RGS implements many features to provide connection security including Authentication When a local user attempts to connect to a Remote Computer the user credentials are validated using the native authentication method on the Remote Computer If the credentials are not authenticated the connection is closed On Windows authentication uses NTLM or Kerberos On Linux authentication uses the Pluggable Authentication Module PAM Authorization Multiple connections to the same Remote Computer are only allowed if the user logged into the desktop of the Remote Computer primary user allows the connection When another user attempts to connect to the Remote Computer an authorization dialog is displayed on the desktop of the Remote Computer that asks whether the new user should be allowed to connect
144. enentresaceeayeeea eas E Ea 12 Foure t2 RGS Sender and Wl 1e 1 see ene ene ee en ee eee ene 13 Powe lee Teaduses ON Gl i sacra clea ceceete ene E E E E E E S A 14 Figure 2 1 Computers and operating systems that support RGS 5 3 0 0 cccccccccceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 18 Houe 22 ROS Veron TINS FINN siete sete dass Scie ae eee rae cnc h occeestes a nec teen ene enue neste uninear A 19 Figure 2 3 Dialog generated when the RGS Sender is unlicensed ccesceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeaaeeeeeseeeaanneeees 20 Figure 2 5 The Remote Computer frame buffer containing the Windows desktop ccccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaee ees 21 Figure 2 6 Display of the Remote Computer frame buffer on the Local Computer cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaaeeeees 22 Figure 2 7 Addition of scroll bars if the Remote Display Window is resized smaller cccceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 23 Figure 2 8 A Local Computer displaying two desktop SESSIONS seeeccceeeeseeeeeeeee ese eeeeeeesseeeeeeeessaaeseeeeeeeaa estes 24 Figure 2 9 Multiple users can access the desktop of a Remote Computer cccccsseeeeseceeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaee ees 24 Figure 2 10 Sharning between WOT SIONS ccc ade enter co cas eonia eE ENEE ENEE 25 Figure 221 rence Login PROG ess ceee ae EEEE E tear 25 Figure 2 12 RGS connection process if another user is already logged into the Remote Computer 000cc00e 26 Figure 2 13 Rem
145. entered actually exists in C WINDOWS system32 When the computer restarts the custom GINA module will be loaded by the WinLogon exe process Installing and Enabling Easy Login A CAUTION Installing RGS Easy Login is for experienced users and IT administrators only Please read all directions completely before proceeding and exercise caution when installing Easy Login is only supported on HP blade workstations running the RGS Sender The RGS shared library hprgina dll1 enables Easy Login The file hprgina d11 is a GINA Graphical Identification and Authentication module that is loaded by the Window WinLogon exe process There are three ways to install hprgina d1l1 and therefore enable RGS Easy Login on the Sender 1 Enabling Easy Login during installation Easy Login can be enabled during RGS Sender installation enabling Easy Login installs the hprgina d11 module This is the preferred method to enable Easy Login The default during installation is to not enable Easy Login The user must answer two questions to enable Easy Login as shown in Figure 3 12 If Easy Login is enabled the computer must be restarted before Easy Login is operational 2 Using the rgadmin tool to enable Easy Login The rgadmin tool can be used to enable Easy Login check the Enable Easy Login radio button as shown in Figure 3 11 and click Apply Enabling Easy Login installs the hprgina d11 module Using the rgadmin tool to enable Easy Logon is preferred
146. ents of the frame buffer RGS can also be used in a desktop virtualization environment to capture compress and transmit the contents of a virtual frame buffer A virtual frame buffer is a segment of system memory that is used to store the desktop image to be displayed HP s Virtual Desktop Infrastructure VDI solution allows multiple user desktop sessions to run as separate virtual machines while sharing the underlying physical hardware resources such as CPU memory networking and storage For information on VDI visit www hp com go vdi For information on installing and using RGS in the VDI environment see Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI RGS overview 44 2 2 Remote Computer power saving states In order for a Local Computer to establish connection to a Remote Computer the Remote Computer cannot be in a power saving state such as Windows hibernate or standby Furthermore the Remote Computer cannot utilize wake on LAN in an attempt to power up in order to respond to a connection request from the Local Computer the Remote Computer must be powered up and able to respond to an RGS connection request at all times 2 22 Supported keyboard locales The following keyboard localizations are supported when connected to a Linux Sender ao oe ee i The following keyboard localizations are supported when connected to a Windows Sender ee ee ee ee _ oo O e e NNNNNNNDND SSP ye ae PSK Se Se ea eS ee Se Fr
147. er timeout value The timeout in milliseconds used to detect and disconnect an inactive connection This option sets the property Rgsender Network Timeout Error See Network timeouts for more details authtimeout value The timeout in milliseconds used to detect and notify the user of a network disruption This option sets the property Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog See Network timeouts for more details l logSetupFile Specifies the logSetupFile file used to describe various logging parameters for Sender error and informational output This file is used to determine where the output goes to a file or to standard error as well as the type of output logged INFO or DEBUG At installation the Sender default is with I logSetup turned on where the logSetup file in the installation directory is set for output to a file named rg log at INFO debug level v ver version Prints the Senders version information and is useful from a command window h help Prints a listing of the various command line options those that are listed on this page and is useful from a command window belownormal Sets the process priority of the Sender to below normal normal Sets the process priority of the Sender to normal This is the default priority abovenormal Sets the process priority of the Sender to above normal high Sets the process priority of the Sender to high Installing RGS 55 Rgsender
148. er Local Computers Primary User logged into Remote Computer Remote Computer Local User 1 viewing primary user s desktop session If the Remote Computer is a blade workstation it will typically not have a monitor connected to it The above image associated with the Remote Computer is for clarity to show the source of the desktop image Local User 2 viewing primary user s desktop session RGS overview 24 The one to many configuration is ideal for collaboration because each user can interact with the applications running on the Remote Computer subject to RGS policies which arbitrate which user is able to provide keyboard and mouse inputs to the Remote Computer at any particular time As one user interacts with the applications on the Remote Computer all other users can view these interactions See Section 5 5 Collaborating for details In the previous example it was assumed that the primary user and the local users were all physically separate from the Remote Computer This however doesn t have to be the case RGS works equally well sharing between workstations see Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Sharing between workstations Remote Computer Local User 1 viewing primary user s desktop session Primary User is logged into the computer using its attached keyboard mouse and monitor Local User 2 viewing primary user s desktop session In Figure 2 9 the pri
149. er Log IsFileLoggerEnabled is set to 1 The default path on Windows is located in the directory where the RGS Receiver is installed normally C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver rg log The default path on Linux is SHOME hpremote rgreceiver rg log Rgreceiver Log Level string INFO Rgreceiver Log Level IsMutable bool 1 RGS supports five logging levels DEBUG INFO WARN ERROR and FATAL If DEBUG is chosen all level of output from DEBUG to FATAL will be output to the log file If WARN level is chosen all levels from WARN to FATAL will be output The default value is INFO all DEBUG output is turned off Rgreceiver Log MaxFileSize int 1024 Rgreceiver Log MaxFileSize IsMutable bool 1 This sets the maximum size of the log file in kilobytes Kbytes The default maximum size is 1 024 Kbytes Rgreceiver Log NumBackupFiles int 5 Rgreceiver Log NumBackupFiles IsMutable bool 1 If the log file exceeds its maximum size the log file will be saved and a new log file will be created This property sets the number of extra files that will be saved The default number of saved files is five 8 5 12 Receiver image codec properties Rgreceiver ImageCodec IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 the local user can adjust the image quality using the Remote Display Window Toolbar If set to O the user cannot change the image quality This property and the following property can be used to permanently set the image quali
150. er to those Microsoft operating systems in Figure 2 1 that support the RGS Sender Similarly references to Windows in the context of the RGS Receiver refer to those Microsoft operating systems in Figure 2 1 that support the RGS Receiver For more information on HP products please visit http www hp com su RGS overview 18 2 2 RGS version numbering The RGS version for example version 5 3 0 contains the following three numbers 1 Version major number 2 Version minor number 3 Version patch number Figure 2 2 shows the positioning of the three version numbers RGS 5 3 0 major minor patch E it it Figure 2 2 RGS version numbering Patch releases are generated for a security issue or for a major defect in a feature A patch release is indicated by this number being non zero Therefore RGS 5 3 0 is not a patch release RGS 5 3 1 would be a patch release Minor releases introduce new RGS features and functionality Minor releases will also include roll up the changes in any prior patch releases A major release contains sufficient changes such that interoperability with the prior major release is not guaranteed For example Sender version 5 3 0 is not guaranteed to interoperate with Receiver version 4 2 0 f NOTE Each patch release is a complete release of the entire RGS product regardless of what components have changed For example if a patch release is needed to make an RGS Sender security fix
151. er unexpectedly terminated e The Remote Computer experienced a failure e The Remote Computer CPU utilization prevented the Sender from making progress e The length of this connectivity loss exceeds the Receiver s error timeout value controlled by the Receiver Rgreceiver Network Timeout Error property so the Receiver disconnected If this condition persists it is possible that network disruptions are exceeding the Receiver error timeout value If this is a network issue and is not resolvable consider adjusting the error timeout of the Receiver to reduce Receiver disconnection Additionally the Sender timeout might need to be increased too Please refer to Section 6 4 Network timeouts for further details When connecting to a Linux Remote Computer the PAM authentication dialog displayed by the Receiver does not appear long enough to enter the user s credentials such as username and password This is likely caused by the Receiver dialog timeout value being too small See the section Using Timeouts for further details on setting timeouts The user should first check the Receiver Control Panel to determine the Network dialog timeout setting and adjust as appropriate When connecting to the Remote Computer the authorization dialog is not displayed long enough for the user to respond to it This is likely caused by too small of a Sender s dialog timeout value Please refer to Section 8 6 4 Sender network timeout properties
152. ere it resides Installing RGS 58 The GINA Setup tab on the rgadmin tool can be used to enable Single Sign on and Easy Login see Figure 3 11 When rgadmin is brought up it reports the current status of Single Sign on and Easy Login To change the status check the desired radio button After clicking Apply you ll be requested to restart your computer this is required in order for the new setting to take affect Figure 3 11 Dialog to enable or disable Single Sign on and Easy Login RGS Admin Tool 30 Updates GINA Setup Single Sign on Easy Login Setup AGS Single Sign on and AGS Easy Login enables fewer authentication steps to login to or unlock a user s remote desktop The AGS GINA module named hprgina d11 can be configured to enable Single Sign on or Easy Login See the HP Remote Graphics Sottware Users Guide for more details Enable Single Sign on Chained GINA Dill Enable Easy Login Disable Single Sign on and Easy Login readmin A Easy Login has been enabled Please restart vour system For Easy Login to take effect Pa r Installing RGS 59 Installing and enabling Single Sign on CAUTION Installing RGS Single Sign on is for experienced users and IT administrators only Please read all directions completely before proceeding and exercise caution when installing Single Sign on is only supported on HP blade workstations running the RGS Sender The RGS share
153. ers and Groups Performance Logs and Alerts Device Manager 2 Information Gi Information i Information Gi Information i Information Gi Information i Information Gi Information 4 6 2009 4 6 2009 4 2 2009 4 2 2009 4 2 2009 41212009 4 2 2009 4 2 2009 11 26 57 PM 11 18 03 PM 4 39 16 PM 4 56 29 PM 3 00 18 PM 3 00 15 PM 20925 PM 20925 PM A PM rgsender rgsender rgsender rgsender rgsender rgsender rgsender rgsender rgsender Ra5 5EMDER Rifa5 SEMDER Rita5 SENDER Rila5 SENDER Rita5 SEMDER Ria5 SENDER Rifa5 SENDER Rila5 SENDER Rifa5 SEMDER Information 4 2 2009 Information 4 2 2009 Information 4 2 2009 Information 3 31 2009 Information 3 31 2009 gt Ed nformation 3 31 2009 Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management ae Services and Applications 2 45 03 PM rgsender 2 39 49 PM rgsender 5 01 34 PM rgsender HSS 24 PM rgsender 7 33 14 PM rgsender Ria5 SENDER Rifa5 SENDER Rifa5 SEMDER Rifa5 SEMDER Ria5 SENDER e e oC a iN ear alle ee A CULT Ti To view the HPRemote log bring up the above dialog by selecting Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Computer Management Then in the left pane select System Tools followed by Event Viewer the HPRemote Event Viewer is highlighted The HPRemote log reflects recent RGS connection activity The log entries are in Last In First Out LIFO order By default the most recent events are listed fir
154. es HP Remote Graphics Sottware 5 3 0 User Guide h Part number 391829 409 D Eighteenth edition September 2009 Copyright 2009 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P The information contained herein is subject to change without notice The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein The HP Remote Graphics Sender for Windows uses Microsoft Detours Professional 2 0 Detours is Copyright 1995 2004 Microsoft Corporation Portions of the Detours package may be covered by patents owned by Microsoft corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows XP and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and other countries Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U S and other countries Part number 391829 409 Eighteenth edition September 2009 Acknowledgments HP Remote Graphics Software was developed using several third party products including but not limited to OpenSSL This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com This product includes crypto
155. esolution for ESX 3 0 1 running XP images is 1180x885 with 16 or 32 bit color depth This can be changed by setting the three svga lt X gt parameters described above The following table shows several common screen size configurations Svga vramSize 16 bit color 32 bit color _ 1280x1024 1280 1024 2621440 5242880 1600x1200 1600 1200 3840000 7680000 Screen Resolution svga maxWidth svga maxHeight To compute Svga vramSize values for other screen topologies use the formula HxWkxDe V where H screen height in pixels W screen width in pixels D color depth in bytes 2 16bit 4 32bit V vramSize in bytes A 2 3 Installing the RGS Sender on the virtual machine The RGS sender is installed on the virtual machine the same way as on a physical machine The installation CD or ISO image must be mounted inside the virtual machine or the file images can be made available on a file share for installation The RGS Sender installation steps are 1 Start the RGS Sender installer 2 Follow the Sender installer on screen instruction and select the options appropriate for your environment A 3 Using RGS with dynamic HP VDI based on VMware View In this document dynamic HP VDI is based on using the VMware View manager The following steps assume you are familiar with VMware View and have read the View installation and configuration documentation that information is not repeated here To install RGS in a VMware View environment pe
156. evices To remotely attach USB microphones to the Remote Computer either of these Remote USB Configuration settings can be selected e USB devices are Remote USB devices are Local Remote If USB devices are Remote is selected a USB microphone can be accessed anytime by the Remote Computer If USB devices are Local Remote is selected how the USB microphone can be accessed by the Remote Computer depends on when the microphone is connected to the Local Computer relative to establishment of the connection If the microphone is connected to the Local Computer prior to establishment of the RGS connection the microphone will be a local device only and will be accessible by the Remote Computer only via the Receiver RGS Audio Recorder If the microphone is connected to the Local Computer after RGS connection establishment the microphone will be a remote device only and can be accessed directly by the Remote Computer Figure 2 19 shows these two cases HP recommends using the audio access method introduced at RGS 5 2 0 whereby the Remote Computer can directly access the USB microphone for the following reasons e The pre RGS 5 2 0 audio access method continuously records and transmits audio independent of whether the application on the Remote Computer is requesting audio input This can consume network bandwidth especially when the level of background noise at the microphone is above the audio threshold used to detect valid audio e The
157. ewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender rgsenderconfig On Linux these files are located as follows Receiver etc opt hpremote rgreceiver rgreceiverconfig Sender etc opt hpremote rgsender rgsenderconfig The configuration files contain property name value pairs with only one property per line Empty lines containing only whitespace characters are ignored The character begins a comment on the line extending to the end of the line If a property is listed more than once the value of the last entry is used f NOTE All properties in the configuration files are initially commented out with the character To set a property in a configuration file first delete the character preceding the property name and then set the property to the desired value i IMPORTANT RGS properties set in a configuration file do not take affect until the associated program is restarted For example if the rgreceiverconfig file is changed the Receiver should be restarted Likewise it the rgsenderconf ig file is changed the Sender should be restarted RGS properties 139 8 3 Setting properties on the command line Properties can also be set on the command line when the Receiver and Sender are started Property values entered on the command line override any properties set with other methods All properties must begin with a on the command line to be recognized as a valid property For example on Linux rgreceiver sh Rgreceiver Network T
158. f the Remote Computer possibly requiring the Remote Computer user to cycle power on the computer to regain control Rgsender PreferredDisplayMethods string GPU ChangeList Comparitron Introduced at RGS 5 3 0 this property controls the order of and use of the three methods the RGS Sender may use to process the video stream prior to sending it to the Receiver This property should not normally be changed from the default built into the RGS Sender Enter the methods in priority order of usage If a method is not currently supported in the system the next method in the list will be tried The rgdiag tool will report which methods are supported on Microsoft Windows see Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows e GPU uses the Graphics Processing Unit GPU hardware to quickly compare one full screen to a previous full screen A specific graphics card and driver are required The RGS Sender will test for the availability of the graphics card and driver This method is supported only on Microsoft Windows Vista and later e Changelist method uses in Microsoft Windows the RGS mirror driver and on Linux the Remote Graphics X server extension to detect display changes Microsoft Vista and later is forced to Basic mode Aero mode is not supported e Comparitron method uses the system s CPU to compare one full screen to a previous full screen This method is supported only on Microsoft Windows Animated cursors are displayed as a static curso
159. fied start the Receiver in Directory Mode see Figure 7 1 Figure 7 1 Starting the Receiver in Directory Mode rm HP Remote Graphics winzip Receiver directory Alternatively the Receiver can be started in Directory Mode from a command line using either of the following C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver rgreceiver exe directory file C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver rgreceiver exe directory If a file name is specified after directory the Receiver will use that file as the directory file If no file name is specitied the user is prompted by RGS to specify the path and name of the directory file In Directory Mode the Receiver Control Panel displays the name of the directory file see Figure 7 2 The Change button enables you to specify a different directory file The Connect All button is used to establish a connection to the Remote Computers listed in the directory file Figure 7 2 The Receiver Control Panel in Directory Mode HP Remote Graphics Receiver Directory File Disconnect All Connect All After clicking Connect All you ll need to independently authenticate and log into each Remote Computer Using Directory Mode 137 7 1 3 Selecting Remote Display Windows while in Directory Mode Activate Setup Mode by the hotkey sequence as opposed to the Setup Mode button to bring up the Remote 1 2 Display Window selection dialog to view
160. figuration of remote USB see Chapter 3 Installing RGS for more details NOTE The Remote USB configuration cannot be changed after installation of the Sender and Receiver to select a different USB configuration option the Sender or Receiver must be uninstalled and reinstalled During installation of the RGS Receiver you can select one of three Remote USB Configuration options see Figure 2 18 Remote Graphics Receiver InstallShield Wizard Remote USB Configuration How do you wish to configure Remote USB USB devices are Local USB devices are Remote USB devices are Local Remote l m not sure want more information installed ocean Io ns M concet Figure 2 18 Receiver installation dialog to specify the Remote USB Configuration The three Remote USB Configuration options are 1 USB devices are Local All USB devices will remain local and will be accessible only by the Local Computer none of the USB devices will be accessible by a Remote Computer USB devices are Remote All USB devices can be accessed by the Remote Computer and none of the USB devices can be accessed by the Local Computer USB devices are Local Remote Whether USB devices are locally or remotely accessible depends on when they are plugged into the Local Computer relative to establishment of an RGS connection see Figure 2 19 IMPORTANT In addition to the general default settings for remote USB contigurations RGS 5 2 6
161. file the RGS Sender will still function correctly and you ll be able to establish a connection from the RGS Receiver However the dialog shown in Figure 2 3 will be displayed in the Remote Display Window Installation of the license file is described in detail in the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_manuals Installing RGS 53 6 Next the Sender installer will run the rgdiag exe diagnostics tool If the tool detects a problem the dialog shown in Figure 3 6 is displayed This dialog allows you to run rgdiag exe directly refer to the Section Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows for information about using this tool Remote Graphics Sender InstallShield Wizard HP Remote Graphics has been successfully installed Your current Windows system settings may cause problems when running the Sender Do you wish to run Remote Graphics Diagnostics to identify problems Q Yes run Remote Graphics Diagnostics No do not run Remote Graphics Diagnostics installed lt Back New TL cane Figure 3 6 Diagnostics prompt dialog 7 You will be prompted to restart your computer after the Sender installation is complete Select yes when asked to restart the system Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows After completion of a normal installation of the Windows Sender the RGS Diagnostics Tool rgdiag exe automatically runs to detect potential issues such as Windows firewall se
162. g the RGS audio capabilities available under the Receiver Control Panel Audio tab Sender audio configuration and calibration are described 6 2 1 Contiguring audio on the Microsott Windows XP Protessional Sender To configure audio on the Microsoft Windows XP Sender open the Sound and Audio Devices Properties dialog in the Windows Control Panel and select the Audio tab see Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 Sound and Audio Devices Properties dialog Sounds and Audio Devices Properties Volume Sounds Audio Voce Hardware Sound playback P Default device HP Remote Audio v Sound recording A Default device HP Remote Microphone Volume Advanced MIDI music playback as Default device ide Microsoft G5 Wavetable SW Synth v Use only default devices The first step is to configure the Sound playback device if used and the Sound recording device if used As shown in Figure 2 22 RGS audio subsystem on Windows the Sender contains audio components for both Sound playback and Sound Recording microphone input Figure 6 4 on the next page repeats the Sender portion of the diagram from Figure 2 22 and describes how to select the Sound playback and Sound recording devices on your Remote Computer Advanced capabilities 98 Figure 6 4 Microphone device selection and audio playback device selection on the Sender If the R
163. ge over standard TCP IP networks RGS also captures user keyboard and mouse inputs from the thin client and sends them to the blade workstation for processing by Windows or Linux and the applications running on the blade workstation RGS also supports remote USB which enables a user to connect USB devices to the thin client and have the USB devices accessible by the blade workstation In addition HP RGS supports remote audio whereby audio output from the applications is transported over the network for playback on the thin client Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software 12 1 2 RGS Sender and Receiver Figure 1 2 shows the two primary RGS software components the RGS Sender and RGS Receiver The RGS Sender runs on the Remote Computer while the RGS Receiver runs on the Local Computer Figure 1 2 RGS Sender and Receiver RGS Sender Remote Computer RGS Receiver interactive desktop image Local Computer TCP IP network keyboard amp mouse inputs HP Compag t5720 Thin Client Remote User if present Local User HP ProLiant xw460c Blade Workstation The Sender and Receiver provide the following functionality e Sender Runs on the Remote Computer and transmits graphics updates audio and USB data to the RGS Receiver on the Local Computer The RGS Sender receives and processes keyboard events mouse events and USB data from the Receiver e Receiver Runs on the Local Computer The RG
164. gging both the RGS Receiver and the RGS Sender have the ability to log various types of information to log files during their operation If the logging level is set to DEBUG on the Receiver and Sender Remote Clipboard information will be stored in the Receiver and Sender log files These log files can then be used to detect and resolve Remote Clipboard problems Remote Clipboard entries in the log files have the text below preceding the Remote Clipboard information In particular the string format filter identities each log file entry that contains Remote Clipboard information In this section the text preceding the Remote Clipboard information will not be shown 11 08 08 00 26 14 DEBUG format filter Remote Clipboard information Advanced capabilities 130 To demonstrate use of the RGS logs to view Remote Clipboard information on the Receiver and Sender computers an example is presented in which a copy and paste is performed from a Sender computer to a Receiver computer The steps in this example are 1 Set the Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString 1 2 13 Object Descriptor HTML Format Establish an RGS connection from the Receiver to the Sender Open Notepad on the Receiver computer Open Notepad on the Sender computer via the Remote Display Window and enter some text Highlight the text in the Sender Notepad window and then select Copy oS a ae Do a Paste of the text into the Notepad window on the Receiver co
165. go E About E Using Event Logging site msdn microsoft com event logging Microsoft Developer Network vent Logging Event Types Logging Guidelines Event Logging Elements Event Logging Operations Event Logging Model Event Logging Security Adding an Event Source to the Registry Querying for Event Information Reporting an Event Receiving Event Notification Displaying the User for an Event Displaying the Local Time for an Event Event Logging Reference Event Logging Functions Event Logging Structures Windows Event Log About Windows Event Log Using Windows Event Log Windows Event Log Reference GA Send yaa 4dd Content Community Click to Rate and Give Feedback Diagnostics Windows Events EventLogging Event Logging Many applications record errors and events in various proprietary error logs These proprietary error logs have different formats and display different user interfaces Moreover you cannot merge the data to provide a complete report Therefore you need to check a variety of sources to diagnose problems Event logging provides 4 standard centralized way for applications and the operating system to record important software and hardware events The event logging service stores events from various sources in a single collection called an event fog The Event Viewer enables you to view logs the programming interface also enables you to examine logs
166. graphic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com log4cplus This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation htto www apache org log4cplus is available from http log4cplus sourceforge net Advanced Linux Sound Architecture ALSA ALSA provides audio and MIDI functionality to the Linux operating system ALSA is released in source code format under the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 ALSA is used in the HP Remote Graphics Software Receiver for Linux Jack Audio Connection Kit JACK JACK is a low latency audio server written for POSIX conformant operating systems such as GNU Linux and Apple s OS X JACK is released in source code format under the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2 1 February 1999 JACK is used in the HP Remote Graphics Software Receiver for Linux Libsndfile Libsndfile is a C library for reading and writing files containing sampled sound such as MS Windows WAV and the Apple SGI AIFF format through one standard library interface Libsndfile is released in source code format under the GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Libsndfile is used in the HP Remote Graphics Software Receiver for Linux This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation http www apache org Portions of this software were originally based on the following software copyright c 1999 IBM Corporation http www ibm com Where required related sour
167. gs acta ca T E 76 4 3 M nval NIC HC Of UC UCI OM rh crosittee se cscrg sae ctec ein ciel E EE AE EEADERS 76 4 3 2 NIC reconfiguration using the NIC binding properties ccccccccccesseeeeeceeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeaas 78 AA Using IRC through a tirswall ssssiseiiiecesroiss inina ni n n E e aTa 79 5 Using RGS 51 Using ROS in Normal Mode sreo eri n E AN E aS 80 5 1 1 kacer Conroe ea N ene men ee EETA 82 5 1 2 SMOS ee E E E E E A A eee 82 5 1 3 Remote Display Window Toolbar sssnnsssnnnsssnnnssssnnssssnessesressssrrrsssrrrssrrrrssrrrrsssrrrserrerss 85 5 1 4 Remote Computer monitor blanking operation ccccccceeccccesseececeseeeeeeeseeeesesseeeeeesseeseeeeaaeees 86 52 a1 areola gy veli0 ae o p e 1c0 e 1 eee meen mee enn te ene nee ene ne ane Re nnn en ee eee 87 5 2 1 Ful screem eros nair CUGO asea me A E E E T 87 5 2 2 Gamma correction on the Receiver ses cccceseuns ceseateccecececscccceanaccacianes teceesamncacieeo see eeneerein eaeae 87 5 2 3 Black or blank connection session with the Linux Sender cccccccssecceceeeeeeeceseeceseeseeeeeeeaaeeees 87 OO RO ACGIM Ie IOC S isa reetes sce cseneses cena E oes eaeenaeeceaee 88 5 3 1 near oO e EE 88 5 3 2 CA O a a E E ea ncen cere cucceen can ancan ences etnceaeoaneceasens 90 5 3 3 ST Lars fetes Ce 112 0 EE E nn ee erent 91 A Seo ale Lalo ON ofc ici c co lett eee a eee ee ee eee eee nee eee eee ee eer reer ee rere 92 oo EG e 9101 61 11 e a A ee
168. he first field represents the number of primary connections The second field represents the number of non primary connections Each state field provides a text string and binary 32 bit unsigned integer for application use Event Viewer Message Primary connections 1 Non primary connections 2 Strings number of primary connections number of non primary connections 1 2 Data UINT32 numPrimary UINT32 numNonprimary Remote Application Termination 167 RGSENDER CONNECT EventID 4 NOTE Parameter 2 is new in the RGS 5 1 5 release RGSENDER DISCONNECT EventID 5 NOTE Parameter 2 is new in the RGS 5 1 5 release RGSENDER STARTUP EventID 1 RGSENDER SHUTDOWN EventID 2 RGSENDER SET PRIMARY EventID 6 Event Viewer Example Primary connections 1 Non primary connections 0 A new connection was established with an associated name If Easy Login is enabled the name assignment will be deferred until login and the associated name may be Anonymous Event Viewer Message Connect 1 name associated with connection IP address and port number of Local Computer Data None Event Viewer Example Connect MYDOMAIN my username A receiver has disconnected The message will contain the name associated with the connection If Easy Login is enabled and the receiver disconnects prior to a login the associated name may be Anonymous Event Viewer Message Disconnect 1 Strings
169. he RGS Sender to the RGS Receiver Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software 14 e Audio follows focus The RGS Receiver can be configured to enable audio for the session displayed in the Remote Display Window that currently has focus and is muted for all other remote sessions windows e Directory Mode Directory Mode enables the Receiver to look up a user s pre assigned computers from a file e Easy Login Enables fewer authentication steps when connecting to an HP blade workstation running Windows XP e Single Sign on Enables fewer authentication steps and automatic login and unlocking of the desktop when connecting to an HP workstation running Windows XP e Windows Event Logging Network outages or loss of connectivity between a Receiver and Sender can leave a desktop session running without supervision To safeguard running applications customer designed agents can monitor the status of connections to determine if termination of applications is required Windows event logging provides a mechanism for agents to determine the status of the connection between the Receiver and Sender j NOTE See the RGS 5 3 data sheet for latest list of features 1 5 Tabloid size page This guide contains a tabloid size page that is best viewed either on your computer monitor or by printing it on size B 11 inches by 17 inches or ISO A3 297 mm by 420 mm paper The tabloid page is included to permit a complex diagram Figure 5 10 on page 8
170. he Receiver in Directory Mode the Receiver looks for a directory file containing user names and their assigned Remote Computers The Receiver reads this file to identity the Remote Computers assigned to the current user and then attempts to automatically connect to each specitied Remote Computer The directory file may contain multiple users with a list of Remote Computers assigned to each user The default directory file used by the Receiver is C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver directory txt After the directory file name is determined the Receiver automatically connects to the Remote Computers specified in this file for the named user 7 1 1 Directory tile format Often the directory file is a common file for a group department organization or an entire company The directory tile can manage and administer the Remote Computer assignments for any number of users HP recommends that you save the directory file on a readily accessible network file share or mapped drive so that each RGS Receiver can read the file at start up The directory file is a text file with the following format for each local user domainName localuser remotecomputerl remotecomputer2 remotecomputerN where domainName is the name of the Windows domain If your computer is not part of a Windows domain use the name of the computer in this field For Linux use UNIX Localuser is the name of the local user remotecomputerl remotec
171. herefore these properties are not listed nor described in the next two sections on user settable RGS Receiver and Sender properties RGS properties 140 8 5 RGS Receiver properties This section describes the RGS Receiver properties RGS supports two types of Receiver properties e Per Receiver properties The per Receiver properties affect all Remote Display Windows generated by the Receiver As noted in Section 2 8 3 Many to one connection a Receiver can connect to multiple Remote Computers and therefore generate multiple Remote Display Windows e Per session properties New in RGS 5 0 the per session properties also known as per connection properties allow the user to specify the property values of each RGS connection For example in a many to one configuration per session properties can be specified for each Remote Display Window displayed by the Receiver 8 5 1 Receiver property hierarchy RGS supports the following hierarchy of methods to set the Receiver properties see Figure 8 1 Figure 8 1 Receiver property hierarchy Highest Properties set using the Receiver Control Panel propericesettisina the Receiver Contral Panel Receiver command line properties are saved as archive file properties upon closing rgreceivercontig file properties of the Control Panel Upon restarting the RGS Archive fil ii Receiver the last saved archive file properties E E id s are in this position in the Receiver property hierarchy
172. iNdOW nusneeszio enai terial eeechesous sth leh ha chwasGmen hich Sie chen oasse Ra EAE 100 Figure G0 Example VOIUIMesCONITOIS p56 icateicd 32 hondtecnddancdt2 T i a ar a teense 100 Figure 6 7 Recording Control Window widens tata cteten used sins cacduiee sa aes ata Siace cei a ta mean uae Senha NA 101 Foure O 0 Vome contol WIM OW scissile cui ita ah ees tee obs E Meta teanat ects et 101 Figure 0 2 Recording Control Wid OW fascia nca orcs oenssi tes datesweetaeustandte T a 102 Figure 6 10 Sound and Audio Devices Properties WINdOW cccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeee cess eeeeeeeeaseeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeaaenes 103 Blige oral IE Ure Ife cola ido Coens mere Me ere E aTS oC Ene ee Oe Men nr eee ira ae eee en en eee ee ere ae te ee 104 Figure 6 12 USB configuration during Receiver installation USB devices are Local or Remote ccsseeeeeeees 106 Foure Oro SB NCIS ONS er bates tact ae E E V EEE T tab see 107 Figure 6 14 Prior to remote attachment of the USB drive key cccceceseececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeseeeeaaeeeeees 108 Figure 6 15 After remote attachment of the USB drive key ccccccccsseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeees 108 Figure 6 16 Dynamically moving USB devices to another Remote Computer ceccccececteeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaaeees 109 Figure O 7 Cheekbox to enaple Remote US Baueris T ess aueeesiaver 115 Figure 6 16 HP Remote Virtual USB driver esras airsean eA A ca Guustvactnn
173. ibes the RGS advanced capabilities that are provided by each of the tabs in the Receiver Control Panel Chapter 7 Using Directory Mode Establishing RGS connections using Directory Mode is described in this chapter Chapter 8 RGS properties This chapter describes each of the RGS Sender and Receiver properties Chapter 9 Sender event logging on Windows This chapter describes the Windows event logging capability of RGS Chapter 10 Remote Application Termination This chapter describes how the Windows event logging capability of RGS can be used to terminate applications if a desktop session is left running without supervision Chapter 11 Optimizing RGS performance This chapter provides a number of suggestions to optimize RGS performance Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software 11 Chapter 12 Troubleshooting RGS This chapter describes how to troubleshoot issues related to establishing an RGS connection network timeouts graphics performance remote audio and remote USB Chapter 13 RGS error messages This chapter lists each of the errors reported by the RGS Receiver and describes their probable cause Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI This appendix describes how to use RGS with the HP Virtual Desktop Infrastructure solution Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS This appendix lists the USB devices that are supported by RGS Note that prior to RGS 5 2 0 this list was maintained in a separate document this
174. igure 4 1 Figure 4 1 Viewing NICs S Network Connections File Edit view Favorites Tools Advanced Help O Back gt i pa Search Wey Folders H Address e Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks a Local 4rea Connection 3 amp Connected Firewalled Lh HP Wes Si Multifunction G Local 4rea Connection 4 5 Connected Firewalled L_ 5 HP Mics Multifunction Gigabi create a new connection pct Set up 4 home or small oFFicre mabisiarl 2 Double click each LAN icon and the Support tab which displays the NIC IP address see Figure 4 2 While this provides the IP address of each NIC it does not indicate which NIC is considered the first NIC Figure 4 2 NIC IP addresses Local Area Connection 4 Status Support Connection status Connection status a Address Type Assigned by DHLP J Address Type Assigned by DHLP IP Address 10 10 44 59 a IP Address 10 10 42 59 Subnet Mask 205 255 294 0 Subnet Mask 205 255 254 0 Default Gateway 10 10 44 1 Default Gateway 10 10 42 1 Pre connection checklist 76 3 To determine which NIC is the first NIC click Advanced gt Advanced Setting see Figure 4 3 The Advanced Settings dialog is displayed see Figure 4 4 The first NIC is listed at the top in the Connections box In Figure 4 4 the first NIC is Local Area Connection 3 which from Figure 4 2 has an IP address of 10 10 42 59 Figure 4 3 Determining the f
175. igured to occupy the complete frame buffer of the Remote Computer which for this particular Remote Computer requires two monitors to display the Windows desktop Figure 2 12 Remote Computer frame buffer requires two monitors to view the Windows desktop Remote Computer Sender Frame buffer containing the Windows desktop requires two monitors for display When a Local Computer establishes an RGS connection to the Remote Computer of Figure 2 12 the Remote Computer will as usual transmit its complete frame buffer In order for the local user to view the complete desktop of the Remote Computer the Local Computer must have a comparably sized frame buffer which will typically require two monitors to view see Figure 2 13 Figure 2 13 A Remote Display Window spanning two monitors Remote Computer Sender Local Computer j The frame buffer containing the Windows If the Local Computer desktop expands across two desktop requires two monitors for display monitors RGS will be able to create a Remote Display Window that displays the complete Remote Computer frame buffer RGS overview 28 Multiple monitors on the Local Computer are also usetul in the configuration described in Section 2 8 3 Many to one connection If the Local Computer is connected to two Remote Computers each Remote Computer frame buffer can be displayed on its own monitor if the Local Computer has two monitors see Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 Each Remo
176. iial achine Settinc Ub Configuration Parameters xX Gener Modify or add configuration parameters as needed for experimental features or as instructed by technical support vMWar Entries cannot be removed Power Advan Name 2 Value m nvram xp rgs5 nvram sched swap derivedName vmFs volumes 462dfeae e8b8073F 4b7f 001a4b35dd50 xp rgs5 xp rgs5 scsi0 0 redo svga maxHeight 1200 s ga max Width 3840 tools syncTime FALSE vmware tools requiredversion 7201 ymware tools internalversion 7201 vmware tools requiredyversion 7201 ymware tools installstate none vmware tools lastInstallStatus resuk success SMEIOS reflectHost gt Add Row Help OK Cancel 2 IMPORTANT Not all configuration parameters can be added using the dialog shown above Please see VMware View documentation for more details When adding Svga options it is recommended that you do this by manually editing the vmx file The Configuration Parameters that affect RGS functionality are SMBIOS reflectHost TRUE i IMPORTANT This parameter is needed for RGS versions prior to 5 2 0 It is no longer needed for RGS 5 2 0 and later versions This parameter causes the underlying hardware platform SMBIOS records to be mapped into the SMBIOS records of the virtual machine RGS requires the presence of HP specific SMBIOS records to become active This value may be set using the GUI or by directly editing the vmx file of the virtual machin
177. ilable inputs by default The mixer line is often one of the control lines that is not visible by default To make it visible click on the Options item in the menu and then click on Properties as shown Figure 6 5 Recording Control window i Recording Control Options Properties ophone Line In Advanced Controls Exit Ce Balance Pky Oe oad ee he Volume Volume Volume Tr T i Select Select Select SoundMAs Digital Audio This brings up another window showing all available volume controls The control associated with the mixer is often called Wave Out Mix Stereo Mix or some variation on Mixer The Creative Audigy driver calls this the What U Hear control Make sure this control is enabled in a similar manner to Figure 6 6 Figure 6 6 Example volume controls Properties Mixer device SoundMAX Digital Audio E Adjust volume for O Playback Recording Show the following volume controls CD Player Microphone Aux Line Ir Wave Out Mix Advanced capabilities 100 Press the OK button and the Recording Control window should now have the mixer line as one of the controls see Figure 6 7 Make sure this item is selected and the volume level is not at the lowest setting Figure 6 7 Recording Control window ii Recording Control Options Help CD Player Microphone Line In Wave Out Mis Balance Balance Balance Balance A TRT Le hee E ok eae Volume Volume
178. ilities 111 Rules may contain filters based on the 11 parameters listed previously These parameters are repeated below along with the name of the filter element Device Class bDeviceClass Device Subclass bDeviceSubclass Device Protocol bDeviceProtocol Vendor ID idVendor Product ID idProduct Device BCD bcdDevice Manufacturer manufacturer Product Type product ee SS Se T Serial Number serialNumber gt CAUTION Filtering on device strings manufacturer product and serial number may not be reliable Device vendors are not required to add data to these fields and many do not Before deploying a solution that depends on a string based filter ensure that the devices you wish to use implement the appropriate device strings e P address of the Local Computer peerAddress e The domain group of the local user group The following ACL file allows only USB devices with a Device Class bDeviceClass of 7 to be remotely attached while denying everything else lt hprUsbAc1 gt lt ruleset gt lt rule type allow s gt lt name gt Allow printing devices lt name gt lt filter bDeviceClass 07 gt lt rule gt lt ruleset gt lt hprUsbAc1 gt The following ACL file denies USB devices for a specific range of Local Computer IP addresses while allowing all other Local Computers to use remote USB lt hprUsbAc1 gt lt ruleset gt lt rule type allow gt lt name gt Allow all devices lt na
179. imeout Warning 10000 This command will start the RGS Receiver with the Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning property set to 10 000 milliseconds 10 seconds If any property is set more than once on the command line the value of the last entry is used No whitespace characters are allowed between the property name the character and the property value For example rgreceiver sh Rgreceiver IsSnap 1 This property declaration is invalid because of the whitespace on both sides of the character Properties of type int vector cannot be set on the command line CAUTION If a property name is misspelled no user notification is provided and the misspelled property will not take effect If you specify a property in a configuration file or on a command line and it does not appear to take effect first verify that the property name is spelled correctly and that upper lower case usage is correct 8 4 Authenticator properties The following Sender and Receiver properties affect how the user authenticates an RGS connection Rgsender LoggedInAuthenticators Rgsender LoggedOutAuthenticators Rgreceiver Authenticatorid Rgreceiver AuthenticatorId IsMutable CAUTION The authenticator properties are typically set by 3 party software modules integrated with RGS and should not be changed Changing these properties can have unexpected consequences including preventing you from establishing an RGS connection from the Receiver to the Sender T
180. inux the online help is displayed separately in a web browser such as Mozilla On Windows the online help is displayed using the CHM file viewer DNSe e Display program information Click About to display RGS program and copyright information The Receiver Control Panel contains a status bar at the bottom of the window The status bar provides information that describes the current state of the RGS Receiver For example it displays the messages connection in progress connection succeeded and connection failed The status bar can be useful in diagnosing connection problems because it also displays the general reason for a connection failure such as Authorization Failed or Authentication Failed 5 1 2 Setup Mode Depending on how you configure RGS on the Local Computer the Remote Display Window may cover the entire Local Computer monitor Furthermore the Remote Display Window may be set to borderless therefore the window won t have the title bar and borders that normally allow the window to be moved minimized and resized Such a configuration raises a number of questions including e How do you move or resize the window absent a title bar and borders e f multiple Remote Display Windows are covering each other how do you select a particular Remote Display Window to view Complicating the situation is that all keyboard and mouse events in the Remote Display Window are sent to the Remote Computer for
181. irst NIC s Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools eee Help Operator Assisted Dialing 3 F i pak Tf Bi Fa 5E Dial up Preferences Address e Webwork Connections Network Identification Bridge Connections advanced Settings Network Tasks Advanced Setting Optional Wetworking Components Figure 4 4 Advanced Settings dialog Advanced Settings Adapters and Bindings Provider Order Connections are listed in the order in which they are accessed by network Services Connections or 2 Local Area Connection 4 Remote Access connections The arrows to the right of the Connections box in Figure 4 4 can be used to change the order of the NICs and therefore which NIC will be used by the RGS Sender In the above example the RGS Sender will use Local Area Connection 3 with an IP address of 10 10 42 59 To establish a connection from the RGS Receiver to the blade workstation enter a hostname or IP address in the HP Remote Graphics Receiver box If you enter a hostname instead of an IP address it is possible the hostname will resolve to the IP address of an incorrect NIC This could be caused by a number of factors including how your DHCP and DNS servers are configured If the hostname resolves to the IP address of an incorrect NIC you can either e Enter the NIC IP address instead of hostname in the HP Remote Graphics Receiver box e Reconfig
182. ity Options The RGS Diagnostics Tool programmatically detects if this local security policy is set correctly See the section Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows for more information Ea NOTE Creating the GinaDLL registry key disables Window s Fast User Switching and Welcome Screen features Disabling Easy Login There are two methods to disable Easy Login 1 Using the rgadmin tool to disable Easy Login The rgadmin tool shown in Figure 3 11 can be used to disable Easy Login Using the rgadmin tool to disable Easy Login is preferred over the manual method described next 2 Manually disabling Easy Login To disable Easy Login without using the rgadmin tool delete or rename the value of the GinaDLL registry key If there is no other custom GINA module on the system simply removing the GinaDLL key definition from the registry entry below disables Easy Login HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Winlogon GinaD1ll CAUTION If the value of the GinaDLL key contains the name of a custom GINA DLL and the file does not exist in C WINDOWS system32 the system will not start correctly upon the next reboot The system will then require a complete re installation of the operating system The GinaDLL key is removed using regedit the Windows Registry Editor Be sure to actually remove the key by selecting the GinaDLL key in regedit and select the Delete entry in the Edit menu Once the key i
183. ity slide bar in the Remote Display Window Toolbar 16 125 22 84 m kS Image quality 62 0 100 FE Boost 11 kbits sec 3 Updates sec Ej NOTE Even with an image quality of 100 RGS still performs some image compression to reduce the network bandwidth requirements While the image quality on the Receiver will usually appear visually lossless to the user the actual image data sent over the network will be lossy to a limited extent RGS overview 30 2 16 Remote USB overview RGS supports remote USB which allows USB devices connected to the Local Computer local USB devices to be attached to a Remote Computer Remote USB is supported on Remote Computers running Windows and enables the Remote Computer to have direct access to the local USB devices as if they are connected directly to the Remote Computer see Figure 2 16 For details on remote USB see Section 6 3 Remote USB operation Figure 2 16 Remote Computer can access the local USB devices Local Computer Keyboard amp mouse Remote always connected ee to Local Computer Computer In Figure 2 16 two USB devices are connected to the Local Computer Using RGS the local USB devices can be attached to the Remote Computer The keyboard and mouse always remain connected to the Local Computer and cannot be attached to the Remote Computer The local USB devices can be collectively attached to a single Remote Computer see Figure 2 17 The local USB devices
184. ktop and the logged in user disconnects your connection will be disconnected too The network may have been disconnected closed or temporarily disrupted The Sender service daemon may have been stopped re started or killed The Sender system may have been stopped shutdown or re started If connecting to a Linux computer the X Server may have been stopped or re started The Sender or X Server may have experienced a failure If this error is reported reter to Chapter 4 Pre connection checklist for a list of possible causes The RGS Sender has refused to allow a connection Possible reasons include the following 1 2 The authentication credentials that you entered such as domain name user name and password are not valid or recognized by the Sender system The Sender s authentication is not configured appropriately Please consult the User s manual and README txt for the latest directions and issues with respect to configuring authentication RGS error messages 180 Directory not found or not accessible User not found in directory Authorization failed Error No license found for the sender you are trying to connect to Error License Expired for the sender you are trying to connect to Error License Invalid for the sender you are trying to connect to The directory file is not available Possible reasons include 1 The directory file name or location has been mistyped 2
185. l avoid persistent visual artifacts at the expense of potentially increased bandwidth usage If set to O the alignment of the codec with respect to the screen will be arbitrary as determined by the exposed or moditied region For user desktops that contain primarily 2D applications turning off this property can save network bandwidth The default value is 1 always snap the codec to tile boundaries RGS properties 158 NOTE Beginning at RGS 5 2 5 the default value of the following property has been changed from 0 to 30 Rgsender MaxImageUpdateRate int 30 This property limits the number of image updates per second transmitted from the Remote Computer to the Local Computer The value is the maximum number of updates per second If the image update rate is too high and using too much network bandwidth the MaxImageUpdateRate can be set to limit the number of image updates per second The default value is 30 To specify no limit on the number of image updates per second set the property to O this is interpreted to mean that the image update rate should not be limited Rgsender IsBlankScreenAndBlockInputEnabled bool 1 If set to 1 this property enables monitor blanking on certain Remote Computers when a primary user logs in from a Local Computer This property also enables blocking of input from a keyboard and mouse that are directly connected to the Remote Computer If set to O monitor blanking is disabled The default value is 1 mo
186. l machine VM is the combination of VMware ESX and a virtual desktop The RGS Sender runs on the virtual machine e Static HP VDI Static HP VDI is the one for one replacement of a desktop computer by a virtual machine directly connected to a user on a client computer No connection broker is involved in static HP VDI contigurations e Dynamic HP VDI With dynamic HP VDI users log in through a connection broker which assigns the user to one of several pooled virtual machines e VMware View Manager VMware View Manager also known just as VMware View is a virtual desktop manager connection broker that connects authorized client computer users to virtual desktop sessions In this document VMware View is the connection broker used to create dynamic HP VDI configurations e View Client The View Client is software that runs on the client computer and allows the user to connect to the virtual desktop using VMware View The RGS Receiver also runs on the client computer e View Agent The View Agent runs on each virtual desktop to support establishment of an RGS connection to the client computer Table A 1 shows the versions of RGS that are supported on the different versions of VMware ESX The only desktop operating systems that are supported in concert with RGS on VMware ESX are Windows XP Professional SP2 and SP3 or Windows Vista SP1 or greater Table A 1 VMware ESX versions that support RGS ESX 3 0 1 RGS 5 1 or newer RGS 5 2 and
187. l the Receiver on Windows log into an account with administrator privileges and perform the following steps 1 Go to the directory where you downloaded RGS and change to the directory win32 receiver 2 Double click Setup exe to start the Receiver installation and follow the instructions on the screen Installing RGS 47 3 During the installation the Remote USB Configuration dialog is displayed see Figure 3 1 and Section 2 16 Remote USB overview Additional information can be viewed by selecting I m not sure want more information and clicking Next Select the USB configuration option that meets your needs and click Next Figure 3 1 Receiver Remote USB contiguration dialog Remote Graphics Receiver InstallShield Wizard Remote USB Configuration How do you wish to configure Remote USB USB devices are Local USB devices are Remote USB devices are Local Remote ua l m not sure want more information a Install Stel lt Back Meaty Oe ance NOTE For many USB devices the Windows operating system provides default USB drivers While these default drivers may in fact work with your USB devices it is recommended that you install the manufacturer supplied USB drivers to optimize functionality and performance of your USB devices The manufacturer supplied driver should be installed on the computer Local or Remote where the USB devices will be logically not physically attached 4 The Re
188. lenames rgslicenseserver lt port host gt rgslicensefile lt filename gt noreboot removesettings Setup exe autoremove noreboot Setup exe viewlicense Setup exe help Command line options autoinstall This option performs one of the following e Installs the Sender if it s not already installed e Updates the Sender if a prior version of the Sender is already installed e Repairs the Sender if the version being installed is the same as the version that is already installed The Sender will not be reinstalled if the version of the Sender being installed is older than the version of the Sender already installed agreetolicense Use of this option indicates that the user agrees to the license for use of this software This option is required when doing an install autoremove Remove the sender folder lt folder gt Specifies the destination folder default is C Program Files HewlettPackard Remote Graphics Sender usb Enable remote USB remotemic Enable remote microphone clipboard Enable remote clipboard sso Enable Single Sign on only one of sso and el can be used fel Enable Easy Login only one of sso and el can be used gina lt filename gt Chaining GINA module to use default is msgina dll can only be specified if el is used rgslicenseserver lt port host gt The license to run the RGS Sender is acquired from a license server listening on the specified port and host The
189. linux 64 rgsender config 64 4 Ifthe rgsender config 64 rpm was installed it must be removed first or together as demonstrated above before removing the rgsender_linux 64 rpm package This resolves dependencies between the packages and undoes the previous customizations performed by this rom If you are upgrading your system from a previous version of RGS it is suggested that you remove both packages and then apply the new software rpms for supported results Installing RGS 73 4 Pre connection checklist Establishing an RGS connection from a Receiver to a Sender requires that the Local and Remote Computers be in the correct state This chapter provides a checklist of items that should be verified before attempting an RGS connection R IMPORTANT This chapter can also be used as a troubleshooting aid If a connection attempt fails the checklists below can be used to help diagnose the problem KY NOTE The port used by the RGS Receiver is assigned by the Local Computer OS and can vary The RGS Sender listens on TCP IP port 42966 At RGS 5 2 5 the capability was added to specity the port number used by the RGS Sender The default Sender port number is 42966 as noted above The Sender port number can be changed using the Rgsender Network Port property If this property is used to change the Sender port number from its default value of 42966 the Sender port number must then be specified in establishing an RGS connection from the
190. list 74 you disable Guest logins on the Remote Computer To disable this policy open the Control Panel selecting Administrative Tools selecting Local Security Policy expanding the Local Policies expanding Security Options and setting Network access Sharing and security model for local accounts to Classic local users authenticate as themselves For more information on this topic go to support microsoft com kb 103674 Ensure that the RGS Sender is running on the Remote Computer This can be done on Windows as follows a Click on Start b Right click on My Computer c Select manage from the menu d In the Computer Management console click the sign to expand Services and Applications and select Services The service Remote Graphics Sender should be listed as Started Verify that the rgdiag exe diagnostics tool passes all tests on the RGS Sender on Windows This tool is automatically executed after completion of a normal Sender installation on Windows It can also be run any time after Sender installation Refer to the section Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows for information on running this tool Ensure that the Sender knows its current IP address If the Sender computer has changed networks and has been assigned a new IP address after the Sender was started you ll need to restart the Sender service daemon NIC binding If the Remote Computer has multiple NICs ensure that you attempt to
191. ll Public IP 192 168 0 10 42966 aiec Firewall 192 168 0 5 3279 NAT enabled _ Internet NAT enabled Receiver 192 168 0 1 router a router 192 168 0 1 Firewalls can change the source port numbers examples shown source IP port dest IP port 192 168 0 5 3279 15 2 A B 42966 source IP port dest IP port 192 168 0 1 678 192 168 0 10 42966 Port Forwarding New at RGS 5 1 5 is the ability for the Receiver to use the public IP address of the Sender Ej NOTE The port used by the RGS Receiver is assigned by the Local Computer OS and can vary The RGS Sender listens on TCP IP port 42966 At RGS 5 2 5 the capability was added to specify the port number used by the RGS Sender The default Sender port number is 42966 as noted above The Sender port number can be changed using the Rgsender Network Port property as described on page 162 If this property is used to change the Sender port number from its default value of 42966 the Sender port number must then be specified in establishing an RGS connection from the Receiver to the Sender Pre connection checklist 79 5 Using RGS This chapter describes how to use RGS to establish a connection from a Local Computer to a Remote Computer including e Using RGS in Normal Mode e Functionality and use of the Receiver Control Panel e Setup Mode e Remote Display Window Toolbar e Remote Computer monitor blanking e
192. log The log file is especially useful for automatic installs because installer errors are not displayed on the screen and are only viewable using the log file If the log file already exists when the installer is run the installer will remove the current contents of the log file before writing to it This prevents the log file from growing without bounds Uninstalling the RGS Sender on Windows To uninstall the RGS Sender use the Windows Add or Remove Programs feature from the Control Panel Select Remote Graphics Sender and click Change Remove A dialog box will open with choices for Repair Remove Retain User Settings Remove Delete User Settings Retain User Settings will leave the user specific Sender settings in the registry while Delete User Settings removes the user specific Sender settings from the registry IMPORTANT After the Sender is uninstalled you ll be prompted to restart your computer This restart is very important if it s not pertormed installation of a later version of the RGS Sender may not succeed Installing RGS 67 3 2 Installing RGS on Linux This section describes how to Install and uninstall the RGS Receiver on Linux Install audio on the Linux Receiver Install and uninstall the RGS Sender on Linux i IMPORTANT Support of RGS on RHEL 5 2 or later versions requires that certain components be installed during the installation of RHEL 5 2 During RHEL 5 2 installation you ll be presented wi
193. lsiteubencectasecsiisestenes 111 6 3 6 Determining USB device information cccccccseecccccee es eeeeeeee sees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeaas 113 6 3 7 Troubleshooting remote USB tesco lt isnctassscossnns erceabesassasonnesraabssbdaraenes amoaonsbecounnas chamanetbelensects 114 6 4 Adjusting Network timeout settings acccncsnsesecccara cencanssasaccevaetnsepagineiaeataedeesetiamnersinstaeanenecdesaeneaeess 118 6 4 1 Rewon Ti UE eae R E EEE EE 118 6 4 2 PG OG TVS OS ere E E E EEE E EE EE E A E E EEE ES 123 C MRI 2 2 E E E A E E A E ee ee 124 6 5 1 Changing the Setup Mode hotkey sequence cccccesseeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeueeseeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeaaenees 125 OG Remote Clipboard Opera ON sesscsrssiiieas rrenaren nea A RIEA E EEEE S Ti 126 6 6 1 Remote Clipboard data transfers cssessseecacssssnsasnusrendadnnconssveernandaionsaanciaaaasiineseajeacaesoaatenuees 127 6 6 2 Remote Clipboard MON scescansccetsastecctettscatencnt coucausscceuaeaideonaeetedacecnastscuarg iii derari araa iini 129 6 6 3 Using the RGS log to detect clipboard problems cccccceccccccseeccceeeeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeas 130 67 Receiver and Sender logging aca ccc stn ccc atnes vee seas cadcpacveenmasdecccaul nets anacteccadmtecesaaaessececanssta 133 6 7 1 RECEIVE rOG GING 2t5 cacentionene E EE 133 6 7 2 DOM OCS MN EE EE EE I NE E SE E E AET 134 Contents 5 SIN e a E E ET EEE E E E E E A E 135 Using Directory Mode 7 1 1 Diecon ie Tora
194. lue is 1 hotkeys can be changed by the user Rgreceiver Hotkeys SetupModeSequence string Shift Down Space Down Space up Rgreceiver Hotkeys SetupModeSequence IsMutable bool 1 Defines the Setup Mode hotkey sequence The sequence may only consist of Ctrl Alt Shift and Space keys The sequence must also start with either a Ctrl Alt or Shift key The first key must also be held down through the entire hotkey sequence The default value is Shift Down Space Down Space Up Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsSendCtrlAltEndAsCtrlAltDeleteEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsSendCtrlAltEndAsCtrlAltDeleteEnabled IsMutable bool 1 When enabled a Ctr1 Alt End key sequence in the Remote Display Window is sent to the Remote Computer as a Ctrl Alt Del key sequence The default value is send a Ctr1 Alt Del when the user enters Ctrl Alt End RGS properties 152 Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsSendFirstKeyInSequenceEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsSendFirstKeyInSequenceEnabled IsMutable bool 1 When enabled the first key in the hotkey sequence is sent to the Remote Computer The default value is O don t send the first key in the hotkey sequence Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsKeyRepeatEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsKeyRepeatEnabled IsMutable bool 1 The hotkey sequence is very particular for example shift down space down space up The Windows operating system injects key repeats as repeating down events for example shift down shift down
195. ly into the system32 directory IMPORTANT If the hprgina dl11 does not exist in C WINDOWS system32 do not perform the remaining steps Doing so will put the system in a state that requires a complete re installation of the operating system Add the GinaDLL registry key if it does not already exist If the GinaDLL key does not exist Microsoft s default GINA DLL msgina d11 is loaded by WinLogon Adding the GinaDLL registry key and setting its value to horgina dll1 informs WinLogon to load hprgina d11 instead of the default msgina dll Adding the GinaDLL registry key is done using regedit the Windows Registry Editor Create the key as type REG_SZ a string type The full path of the key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Winlogon GinaDLL Installing RGS 61 4 Set the value of the GinaDLL key to the text hprgina d11 Confirm the spelling before closing Figure 3 14 shows the registry key contents Figure 3 14 Addition of the GinaDLL key to the registry a Winlogon lab GinaDLL hprgina dll 5 Add the GinaD11Mode registry key if does not already exist This can be done through the use of regedit as well Create the key as type RGS_ SZ a string type The full path of the key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender GinaD11Mode 6 To actually enable Single Sign on set the value of the GinaD11Mode key to the text HprSso Confirm the spelling before closing Fig
196. mary user is directly logged into the Remote Computer using its attached keyboard mouse and monitor In other words the primary user is physically present at the Remote Computer while local user 1 and local user 2 are physically separate from the Remote Computer RGS can be used by local users 1 and 2 to connect to the primary user s desktop 2 9 Establishing an RGS connection using Standard Login In normal operation users are required to authenticate twice when establishing an RGS connection from a Local Computer to a Remote Computer This is the Standard Login process the two steps are 1 The first authentication step is from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender this is called authenticating the RGS connection The dialog for this authentication step is generated and displayed by the RGS Receiver on the Local Computer 2 The second authentication step is when logging into or unlocking the Remote Computer desktop session this is called logging into the Remote Computer The login or unlock dialog is generated by the Remote Computer and is displayed in the Remote Display Window on the Local Computer Figure 2 10 shows the two step Standard Login RGS connection process Figure 2 10 Standard Login process Step 1 Authenticating Step 2 Logging into RGS Connection the RGS connection the Remote Computer n T 15 2 76 101 15 2 76 101 Authenticate to 10 10 42 65 s 2 a r Computer Locked Enter domain usemame and password if au
197. mat A text format that includes special formatting features such as bold italics and centering e XML Spreadsheet A format created by Microsoft to allow Excel spreadsheets to be saved in XML Extensible Markup Language format This format is supported by other applications as well Receiver logging properties Rgreceiver Log IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 the logging settings in the Receiver Control Panel can be changed by the user If set to O the user will not be able to change any of the logging settings This property can be used to permanently enable or disable logging settings before the RGS Receiver is started The default value is 1 logging settings can be changed Rgreceiver Log IsFileLoggerEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver Log IsFileLoggerEnabled IsMutable bool 13 If set to 1 logging output from the RGS Receiver will be sent to a file The default value is 1 log to a file Rgreceiver Log IsConsoleLoggerEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver Log IsConsoleLoggerEnabled IsMutable bool 1 This property only applies to the Linux RGS Receiver If set to 1 logging output from the RGS Receiver will be sent to a console window The RGS Receiver must be started in a console window to see the logging output The default value is 1 log to the console RGS properties 154 Rgreceiver Log Filename string rg log Rgreceiver Log Filename IsMutable bool 1 This property specifies the path to the log file and is only used if RgReceiv
198. mation Installing RGS 57 Using the rgadmin tool i IMPORTANT The rgadmin tool is only installed and supported on Windows XP This section describes use of the Sender rgadmin exe tool For a normal Sender installation this tool can be found at C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender rgadmin exe When run the rgadmin exe program displays two tabs The 3D Updates tab see Figure 3 10 can be used to enable automatic 3D updates from the application to the Sender These updates inform the Sender what screen rectangles have been changed by 3D applications Figure 3 10 3D Updates tab RGS Admin Tool aD Updates GINA Setup Automatic 3D Updates Automatic 30 Updates allows OpenGL DirectsD 6 0 and Directo 9 0 applications to automatically send updates to the HP Remote Graphics sender This allows these applications to be viewed remotely See the HP Remote Graphics Software Users Guide for more details Enable Automatic 3D Updates li IMPORTANT RGS versions prior to RGS 4 0 required the manual placement of the RGS OpenGL32 d11 library into the application directory for each application For RGS 4 0 and later this library may cause applications to fail on startup Because automatic updates of OpenGL applications are now supported the OpenGL32 d11 library is no longer required and should be removed from any application directories wh
199. me gt lt rule gt lt rule type deny gt lt name gt Deny 192 168 9 0 subnet lt name gt lt filter peerAddress 192 168 9 0 20 gt lt rule gt lt ruleset gt lt hprUsbAc1 gt The following ACL file allows USB connections for members of the DEFAULT DOMAIN administrators group while denying all other USB connections lt hprUsbAc1 gt lt ruleset gt lt rule type allow s gt lt name gt Allow members of DEFAULT DOMAIN administrators lt name gt lt filter group DEFAULT DOMAIN administrators gt lt rule gt lt ruleset gt lt hprUsbAc1 gt Advanced capabilities 112 6 3 6 Determining USB device information This section describes how to obtain several of the mostused USB device parameters Determining USB device information tor Windows To obtain the Vendor ID and the Product ID for a USB device on Windows perform the following steps 1 Open the device manager e Go to the Control Panel and run System e Select the Hardware tab e Select the Device Manager button this runs the device manager program 2 Double click on the Universal Serial Bus Controllers aa Double click on the specific device which brings up a separate window 4 Select the Details tab and select one of the following properties from the pull down menu e Hardware Ids property This property shows the Vendor ID Product ID and Revision for the device The Vendor ID is the 4 hex digits after Vid_ The Pro
200. modify the checkbox This property can be used to permanently enable or disable global image updates in the Receiver The default value is 1 global image updates can be configured by the user RGS properties 147 Rgreceiver IsGlobalImageUpdateEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver IsGlobalImageUpdateEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 the Receiver updates the area of the screen with the extents of all the areas of the screen that have changed If set to O the Receiver limits updates of the screen to just the areas that have changed using individual update rectangles If image updates in the Remote Display Window show image tearing setting the value to 1 enabling global image updates may reduce the tearing Tearing usually occurs on large images that are updated quite frequently such as a 3D object being rotated in a large window Setting the property value to O disabling global image updates is usually best for large Remote Display Windows 5120 x 1024 resolution that display mostly text based applications The default value is O global image updates are disabled E NOTE The following property was added in the RGS 5 1 3 release to enable RGS performance optimization in high latency network environments g y Rgreceiver MaxImageUpdateRequests int 4 Rgreceiver MaxImageUpdateRequests IsMutable bool 1 This property controls the maximum number of outstanding image update requests between the RGS Receiver requestor and the RGS Sender
201. mote Clipboard Configuration dialog is displayed next see Figure 3 2 and Section 2 18 Remote Clipboard Overview Additional information can be viewed by selecting I m not sure want more information and clicking Next Select the desired Remote Clipboard Configuration option and click Next Figure 3 2 Remote Clipboard Configuration dialog Remote Graphics Receiver InstallShield Wizard Remote Clipboard Configuration Do you wish to enable Remote Clipboard Oo es No l m not sure want more information fsan Bak n O ces Installing RGS 48 E NOTE Selecting Yes will cause the hprclipboard d11 library to be installed with the RGS Receiver If you select No this DLL won t be installed and you won t be able to use Remote Clipboard To enable Remote Clipboard later you would need to reinstall the RGS Receiver and select Yes in the above dialog 5 The final installation step will normally prompt you to restart your computer Automatic installation of the RGS Receiver on Windows The RGS Receiver can be installed or removed in automatic mode Automatic mode allows the Receiver to be installed or removed without any user interaction Automatic mode will also restart the computer if required after the installation process completes Should an illegal combination of command line options be specified or if an error occurs during the install process the install will abort and the error will be
202. mputer To set the Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString as shown above the rgreceiverconfig configuration file is modified to specify the property Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString 1 2 13 Object Descriptor HTML Format The RGS Receiver is stopped and then restarted to ensure this property is used When an RGS connection is established the RGS Receiver sends this filter string to the RGS Sender The log file entries generated by this activity are shown in Figure 6 30 From the RGS Receiver s perspective it s setting a remote filter on the Sender From the Sender s perspective it s setting its local filter string when it receives the filter string from the Receiver Figure 6 30 Transmission of the filter string property from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender RGS Sender RGS Receiver setting remote filter as 1 2 13 Object Descriptor HTML Format setting local filter as 1 2 13 Object Descriptor HTML Format Advanced capabilities 131 Now that the filter string has been sent from the Receiver to the Sender we ll switch to the Remote Clipboard nomenclature of Figure 6 28 Figure 6 31 shows the Remote Clipboard log entries as the cut and paste is performed Figure 6 31 Remote Clipboard log entries for cut and paste sending computer receiving computer cut computer paste computer remote computer application local computer application remote computer local computer UWArowv roa
203. n incorrect Registry setting can cause serious problems you should always make a backup of the Registry prior to making any changes To specify auto remoting of a particular USB device perform the following steps 1 Create the following Registry key HKLM System CurrentControlSet Services hprpusbh Parameters AutoDevice 2 Create the following Registry key where lt N gt at the end of the key can be numbered O thru 31 This allows support of up to 32 auto remoted USB devices HKLM System CurrentControlSet Services hprpusbh Parameters AutoDevice lt N gt 3 In the key created in Step 2 create these two DWORDS Values hprpusbh Parameters AutoDevice lt N gt ProductID hprpusbh Parameters AutoDevice lt N gt VendorID Advanced capabilities 109 4 In the DWORDS created in Step 3 insert the ProductID and VendorlD for the USB device that you want auto remoted To find the ProductID and VendorlD of your USB device perform the following steps a Open Device Manager and find the USB device to be auto remoted b Right click the USB device and select Properties c Select the Details tab and select Hardware Ids in the dropdown menu The Hardware Ids format will be USB Vid_ xxxx amp Pid_ yyyy where xxxx is the VendorlD and yyyy is the ProductlD The VendorlD and ProductID are reported in hexadecimal format and should be entered in hexadecimal format in the DWORD Values 5 To disable all auto remoting create
204. n place of using the Windows Add or Remove Programs feature i IMPORTANT After the Receiver is uninstalled you may be prompted to restart your computer This restart is very important if it s not performed installation of a later version of the RGS Receiver may not succeed Installing RGS 51 3 1 2 Installing the Sender on Windows i IMPORTANT The Sender can only be installed on the computers and operating systems shown in Figure 2 1 Installing the Sender on a non supported computer will prevent an RGS connection from being established E Manual This section covers the following topics Manual installation of the Sender on Windows The Sender diagnostics tool rgdiag exe Starting the Sender on Windows The Sender GUI Manually starting and stopping the Sender Automatic installation of the RGS Sender on Windows NOTE Starting with RGS 5 1 3 installation of the Sender on Windows may be performed remotely using Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection installation of the Sender on Windows To install the Sender on Windows log into an account with administrator privileges and perform the following steps 1 Go to the directory where you downloaded RGS and change to the directory win32 sender 2 Double click Setup exe to start the Sender installation and follow the instructions on the screen 3 During the installation the Remote Graphics Sender Configuration dialog is displayed see Figure 3 3 Check the boxe
205. nce of your USB devices The manufacturer supplied USB driver should be installed on any computer Local or Remote where the USB devices will be logically not necessarily physically attached 4 Next you ll be presented with a dialog to enable either Single Sign On or Easy Login see Figure 3 5 If you re not sure you will be able to configure them later using the rgadmin exe tool Remote Graphics Sender InstallShield Wizard Single Sign On Easy Login Configuration Do you wish to enable Single Sign On or Easy Login Enable Single Sign On Enable Easy Login Do not enable either P InstallShield lt Back fl nens PTL cancel Figure 3 4 Dialog to enable Single Sign On or Easy Login 5 Next the Sender installer will prompt you for the Sender license see Figure 3 5 If you have a Sender license file click the appropriate radio button click Next and provide the requested information If you don t yet have a license file click do not yet have a license file and click Next You can install your license file later Remote Graphics Sender InstallShield Wizard Remote Graphics Sender Licensing Please select how to configure the Remote Graphics Sender License Acquire license from a license server Install a license file on this system do not yet have a license file install Stel lt Back Net ee cancel Figure 3 5 Configuration of the RGS Sender license IMPORTANT Absent a license
206. nd is used by both the Remote and Local Computers The rgreceiverconfig file contains the following entry for this property which indicates the default clipboard formats supported by RGS Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString 1 2 7 8 13 16 17 Ole Private Data Object Descriptor Link Source Descriptor HTML Format Rich Text Format XML Spreadsheet 8 5 1 1 The default clipboard formats are e 1 CF TEXT Text format Each line ends with a carriage return lineteed CR LF combination A null character signals the end of the data Use this format for ANSI text e 2 CF BITMAP Bitmap format e 7 CF_OEMTEXT Text format containing characters in the OEM character set Each line ends with a carriage return linefeed CR LF combination A null character signals the end of the data e 8 CF DIB A memory object containing a BITMAPINFO structure followed by the bitmap bits o 13 CF_UNICODETEXT Unicode text format Each line ends with a carriage return linefeed CR LF combination A null character signals the end of the data e 16 CF LOCALE Locale identifier associated with text in the clipboard e 17 DIBV5 Bitmap color space and bitmap data e Ole Private Data A private application format understood only by the application offering the format e Object Descriptor OlE2 object descriptor Link Source Descriptor link to OLE2 object e HTML Format lext is in Hypertext Markup Language format Rich Text For
207. nder port number the user will need to specify the same port number on the Receiver to establish a connection with the Sender as described in Section 5 1 Using RGS in Normal Mode 8 6 7 Sender clipboard property Rgsender Clipboard IsEnabled bool 1 If set fo 1 Remote Clipboard is enabled specifically the copy and cut functionality in the Remote Display Window is enabled If set to O the copy and cut functionality is disabled The default value is 1 Remote Clipboard is enabled RGS properties 162 9 Sender event logging on Windows The RGS Sender on Windows supports event logging Event logging provides information useful for troubleshooting connection problems and can also be used to automatically terminate applications on the Sender in case the connection is lost between the Sender and the Receiver This chapter describes the Sender event logging capabilities while the next chapter describes how to use event logging to terminate applications on the Sender 9 1 The HPRemote log The Sender event log is called the HPRemote log and can be viewed using the Windows Event Viewer shown in Figure 9 1 Figure 9 1 The HPRemote log Computer Management Sei m Fie Action View Window Help 2 E Information 11 26 56 PM rgsender Mone RG5 5ENDER Gi Information PEE 11 26 57 PM rgsender RaS 5EMDER Computer Management Local ih System Tools il Event vee E 2 Storage Shared Folders Local Us
208. nitor blanking is enabled For details on monitor blanking see Section 5 1 4 Remote Computer monitor blanking operation Rgsender IsIloRemoteConsoleEnabled bool 0 This property is supported only on Linux If set to O the iLO integrated Lights Out console is disabled when an RGS connection is made This prevents the user s desktop session from being visible through the ilo remote console When set to one the user s desktop session will be viewable through the iLO remote console The default is O disable viewing of the user s desktop session through iLO Rgsender IsAnonymousConnectionForceEnabled bool 0 By default Easy Login is only enabled on a blade workstation To enable Easy Login functionality on a standalone workstation this property value can be changed from O to 1 CAUTION Enabling the above property on a standalone workstation Remote Computer may allow a Local Computer user unauthorized access to the Remote Computer If Easy Login is enabled via this property a Local Computer user can connect to the logged out or locked desktop of the Remote Computer without providing a username or password If a user at the Remote Computer console logs in or unlocks the desktop the anonymous Local Computer user will be promoted to a primary user This will result in the Remote Computer monitor being blanked and the Remote Computer input disabled At this point the unauthorized Local Computer user will have full control o
209. nnections on all NICs If Rgsender Network IsListenOnAlliInterfacesEnabled 0 the Sender will listen on any NIC n where Rgsender Network Interface n IsEnabled 1 The default values for this property are as follows For n O the default is 1 listen on this NIC For n gt 1 the default value is O do not listen on these NICs RGS properties 161 Rgsender Network AllowIpAddressSubnet string all IP addresses This property is used to specify the range of IP addresses that the Sender will listen on for an RGS connection request from the Receiver A NIC must be enabled and its IP address must be in the range specified by this property in order for the Sender to listen on the NIC The format for this property is XX XX XX XX yy IP address and netmask in CIDR notation If Rgsender Network IsListenOnAllInterfacesEnabled 1 this property is ignored and the Sender will listen for RGS connections on all NICs If Rgsender Network IsListenOnAllInterfacesEnabled 0 the Sender will listen on any NIC n where Rgsender Network Interface n IsEnabled 1 and the Receiver IP address is in the range specitied by this property Rgsender Network Port int 42966 This property controls the port used for communications with the RGS Sender If this property is not specified the Sender will listen on port 42966 which is the default port used by the Receiver in establishing a connection to the Sender If this property is used to modify the Se
210. nning the RGS Sender or the license server can be installed on a separate computer The RGS product includes a setup exe file that installs the license server see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_manuals for further details ee IMPORTANT Prior to installing the RGS Sender license you can still establish a connection from the Local Computer to the Remote Computer and can interact with the Remote Computer desktop However in the absence of a license the dialog shown in Figure 2 3 will be generated by the Remote Computer and displayed in the window on the Local Computer that is showing the Remote Computer desktop Figure 2 3 Dialog generated when the RGS Sender is unlicensed HP Remote Graphics Sender The licensing system was unable to check out a license For more information on RGS licensing please see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available from wew hp com support rgs manuals ee ee ee en ee ee o a ee ee a a eTe This dialog cannot be moved or closed Once the RGS Sender is licensed the above dialog will no longer be displayed 2 4 RGS products HP offers these RGS products 1 HP RGS Desktop Trial Edition HP offers a free 60 day trial version of RGS Desktop no license purchase is required 2 HP RGS VDI This RGS product runs on HP and non HP VMware VDI Virtual Desktop Infrastructure and HP Blade PC platforms HP RGS VDI uses
211. ntication step is skipped and the local user is presented either with the Welcome to Windows login dialog or the locked screen dialog Figure 5 11 Easy Login process local user e Remote Computer must be an HP blade workstation e Remote Computer must be running Windows e Easy Login must be enabled on the Remote Computer e No other RGS connection can exist attempt to log in using Easy Login another user already connected to the Remote Computer or already logged into it attempt to log in using Standard Login Local user will see the Welcome to Windows login dialog or the locked screen dialog 15 2 76 96 Windows desktop if login or unlock successful i IMPORTANT There are several Sender setup issues that can prevent an Easy Login connection to the RGS Sender The RGS Diagnostics Tool programmatically detects several of these issues and suggests possible solutions See the section Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows for more details Using RGS 90 5 3 3 Single Sign on The Single Sign on flowchart is shown in Figure 5 12 If the Single Sign on conditions are met the user authenticates the RGS connection and the Windows log in or unlock step is skipped The user is presented with the Windows desktop following RGS connection authentication Figure 5 12 Single Sign on process lh local user e Remote Computer must be an HP personal or blade workstation e Remote Computer
212. o a maximum of 4 outstanding image update requests at any given time Figure 8 6 Sequence chart for the default property value of 4 Sender Receiver Image update request 1 Image update request 2 Image update request 3 Image update request 4 Image update response 1 Image update request 5 Image update response 2 Image update request 6 The sequence can vary considerably from that shown in Figure 8 6 For example image update response 1 might be received prior to issuance of image update request 4 Also TCP will temporarily block the Sender from sending further data if the Receiver network buffer becomes full Nonetheless the sequence shown in Figure 8 6 serves to parallelize local display updates that otherwise would occur serially The default property value of 4 was determined empirically as a good compromise for both low and high latency network environments Larger numbers of outstanding requests may be beneficial in some cases depending on the number and types of updates occurring In high latency network environments HP recommends that you characterize RGS performance for different values of the Rgreceiver MaxImageUpdateRequests property RGS properties 149 Rgreceiver IsMouseSyncEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver IsMouseSyncEnabled IsMutable bool 1 This property was added with RGS 5 2 5 and allows the RGS Receiver to track a certain type of mouse movement on the RGS Sender when the Sender computer is running Win
213. of a DNS error The Receiver was able to look up and resolve the specitied hostname or IP address However the Receiver was unable to establish a connection to the Sender There are several possibilities such as the Sender is not installed the Sender is not running the Sender is listening on the wrong network interface or a firewall is blocking the Sender RGS error messages 182 Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI This appendix describes how to use RGS with the HP Virtual Desktop Infrastructure VDI solution Using RGS with HP VDI assumes you have a comprehensive working knowledge of VMware s virtualization products and running Microsoft products within the VMware virtualization environment For general information on HP VDI please visit the website www hp com go vdi For an overview of using RGS with HP VDI see Section 2 20 Using RGS with desktop virtualization For a list of common virtualization terms please see below e Hypervisor A hypervisor is a computer virtualization software environment that allows multiple operating systems to run on a host computer concurrently e VMware ESX VMware ESX is the hypervisor offered by VMware Inc e Virtual desktop A virtual desktop is the desktop operating system that runs within the VMware ESX environment The VMware ESX supported desktop operating systems that support RGS are Windows XP Protessional SP2 and Windows XP Professional SP3 e Virtual machine A virtua
214. ol 1 If set to 1 the user can modify all USB controls in the Receiver Control Panel If set to O none of the USB controls can be changed by the user This property can be used to permanently enable or disable remote USB before the RGS Receiver is started The default value is 1 the user can modify all USB controls Rgreceiver Usb IsEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver Usb IsEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 remote USB will be enabled If set to O remote USB will be disabled The default value is 1 remote USB is enabled RGS properties 151 Rgreceiver Usb ActiveSession int 0 Rgreceiver Usb ActiveSession IsMutable bool 1 When the Receiver is in Directory Mode the Local Computer can connect to one or more Remote Computers This property specities the Remote Computer that the local USB devices are attached to To have all local USB devices attached to the first Remote Computer use value zero To have all local USB devices attached to the second Remote Computer use value one and so on The default value is O the local USB devices are attached to the first Remote Computer The local USB devices can only be attached to one Remote Computer at a time To change which Remote Computer the local USB devices are attached to all Remote Computers must be disconnected Then enter a new value for this property and reconnect to all Remote Computers 8 5 8 Receiver network properties Rgreceiver Network Timeout IsMutable bool If set to
215. om being established Like the Windows RGS Sender the Linux RGS Sender also requires a License Key in order to establish an RGS connection For information on RGS Sender licensing on Linux see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_ manuals To install the Sender on Linux perform the following steps 1 2 3 Log in as root Go to the directory where you downloaded RGS and change to the directory 1in6 4 sender Execute the following command jinstall sh This command will give you a choice of performing a manual installation or a partially automated installation automating steps 5 and 6 The RGS Sender will be installed to opt hpremote rgsender This last step of the install is optional and will ask if you would like to automatically customize the following files to enable proper function of the Linux Sender a etc X11 XF86Config or etc X11 xorg conf The configuration file for the preferred X server will be modified to load the rge extension in the Modules section If a different X server configuration is used that file must be manually configured to load the rge module b etc pam d rgsender This configuration file will be modified to allow the Sender to interact with the currently supported PAM authentication c etc pam d gdm etc pam d kdm etc pam d xdm These configuration files will be modified to ensure proper PAM authentication window manager supp
216. omputer Figure 6 27 Cutting and pasting between Remote and Local Computers Remote Computers RGS Sender to Receiver Local Computer RGS Sender to Sender paste paste computer 1 computer 3 Assume that the desktops of all three Remote Computers paste are being displayed on the computer 2 Local Computer Advanced capabilities 128 6 6 2 Remote Clipboard filtering When a cut is performed applications typically store their data in the clipboard in multiple formats For a word processing application the application might store data in the clipboard as both ASCII text and Rich Text Format This increases the likelihood that when the paste occurs there will be a format recognized by the receiving application For example when a cut is performed within Microsoft Word one of the clipboard formats supported by Word is ASCII text This allows a paste into for example Microsoft Notepad which accepts ASCII text Some data formats like HTML may present problems when pasted into a remote computer HTML for example does not store images in the clipboard but instead stores links to where the images reside on the local computer When the HTML is pasted into the remote computer the pasted links will no longer point to a valid location There are other potential problems such as links to websites Consider the act of cutting and pasting from Microsoft Excel on a local computer to Excel on a remote computer When pasted on
217. omputer2 remotecomputerN are the Remote Computers assigned to the local user as specified by either a hostname or an IP address For example the following directory file specifies the Remote Computers for users Sally and Joe Domaini sally RC 1 RC 2 RC 3 Domainl joe RC 4 RC 5 RC 6 In the above example o Local user sally is assigned Remote Computers RC_1 RC_2 and RC_3 e Local user joe is assigned Remote Computers RC_4 RC_5 and RC_6 If the domain name user name or Remote Computer contains white space characters the name can be enclosed in double quotes as follows domain 1 sally user RC 1 RC 2 RC 3 domain 1 joe user RC 4 IRC oS RC 6 The domain name does not apply when using the directory file for Linux users Instead use the keyword UNIX in place of the domain name For example UNIX sally RC 1 RC 2 RC 3 Comment lines in the directory file are preceded by the character in the first column Using Directory Mode 136 7 1 2 Starting the Receiver in Directory Mode Before attempting a connection in Directory Mode for the first time HP recommends that you verify that RGS can connect to each computer individually in Normal Mode see Section 5 1 Using RGS in Normal Mode As noted in Section 5 1 the pre connection checklist see Chapter 4 Pre connection checklist can be used to verity that the computer and network parameters are set correctly After Normal Mode connectivity is veri
218. onEnabled is disabled 3 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay lsPreterredResolutionEnabled is disabled Then this property has no affect RGS properties 146 E NOTE The following property while supported has been deprecated HP recommends using the per session Remote Display Window X and Y positioning properties described in Section 8 5 13 Windows placement and size properties Rgreceiver RecentWindowPositions int vector 10 10 Rgreceiver RecentWindowPositions IsMutable bool 1 This property can be used to set the positions of the Remote Display Windows The position of each Remote Display Window is controlled by an xpos ypox 2 tuple The following example contains two 2 tuples one for each of two Remote Display Windows Rgreceiver RecentWindowPositions 0 0 1280 0 This property will set the coordinates upper left corner of the first Remote Display Window to 0 0 and the second Remote Display Window to 1280 0 In this example if each Remote Display Window is 1280x1024 the first window will be positioned on the left of the Local Computer display and the second window will be placed immediately adjacent and to the right of the first window making them appear as one large 2560x1024 display Rgreceiver ConnectionWarningColor string 0x80b40000 Rgreceiver ConnectionWarningColor IsMutable bool 1 The Connect ionWarningColor property sets the warning color that overlays the Remote Display Window wh
219. onnection Data None Event Viewer Example Assign Anonymous connection to MYDOMAIN myusername RGSENDER_CONNECT_USB_DEVICE A new USB device was connected to the sender via remote USB EventID 9 Event Viewer Message USB Device Connect Class 1 Vendor ID 2 Product ID 3 Manufacturer 4 Product 5 Strings USB device class USB device vendor ID USB device product ID USB device manufacturer string USB device product string o e N e A gt oO of oA oP WW Ul Data None RGSENDER_ DISCONNECT USB DEVICE A new USB device was disconnected to the sender via remote USB EventID 10 Event Viewer Message USB Device Connect Class 1 Vendor ID 2 Product ID 3 Manufacturer 4 Product 5 WN 2 Q 72 device class device vendor ID device product ID device manufacturer string device product string o e N e A gt oO of oA oP UI U9 J Q Q RGSENDER_ CONNECT USB DENIED A USB device connection was denied by the USB access control list EventID 13 Event Viewer Message USB Device Connection Denied Class 1 Vendor ID 2 Product ID 3 USB device class Remote Application Termination 169 USB device vendor ID USB device product ID None 10 3 Sample agent The sample Windows agent presented below monitors the HPRemote event log and interprets its events Comments are included in the agent code showing where additional code would be added to determine if the n
220. onnection In this case the PAM subsystem invokes a PAM conversation callback function to the Receiver causing the Local Computer to prompt the user with a PAM message dialog The dialog typically requests a username and password The timeout for the dialog on the Receiver is controlled by the Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog property If this timeout expires without the local user entering a username and password the Receiver will remove the dialog Ef NOTE The property Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog does not control the duration of all dialogs displayed by the Receiver For example the authentication dialog for a Windows Sender connection displayed by the Receiver for username and password does not have an associated timeout since it is not an incoming message from the Sender to the Receiver This dialog will be displayed indefinitely until the user responds OK or Cancel to its requests The Receiver dialog timeout property Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog can be set using the Receiver Control Panel as shown in Figure 6 21 and has a default value of 15 seconds 15 000 milliseconds This property can also be set using the rgreceiverconfig file and from a command line The Sender dialog timeout property Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog can only be set using the rgsenderconfig file and from a command line there is no dialog on the Sender for setting this property The default value of this property is also 15 seconds The 15 second
221. op sessions as part of a normal workflow However when an RGS connection is unintentionally disconnected the user may require remote applications to be terminated to prevent them from operating unsupervised The sample agent described in this chapter monitors the number of primary users connected to the Remote Computer When the number of primary users drops to zero the agent terminates all applications on the Remote Computer To determine the number of primary users the agent reads and interprets the HPRemote log 10 2 HPRemote log format Data in the HPRemote log consists of a Message ID followed by optional data in both character string and binary data formats Binary data provides direct access to data without requiring application parsing Character strings format the binary data into human readable messages compatible with the Windows Event Viewer Table 10 1 shows the events logged in the HPRemote log The Message IDs are defined in the header file RGSenderEvents h and are 32 bit values The EventID is from the Code field within the Message ID and for the HPRemote log ranges from 1 to 13 Table 10 1 RGS Sender events logged in the HPRemote log RGSENDER CONNECT STATE The connection state consists of zero or more primary connections and zero or more non primary connections Each event entry EventID 3 records the current number of active connections in each category Events appear when the connection status of these users changes T
222. operty Dialog 15 EJ Note Must be disconnected to adjust timeouts is grayed out RGS properties 144 8 5 3 Receiver general properties The general properties are listed below After each property the default value is listed in parenthesis Rgreceiver IsBordersEnabled bool default 1 Rgreceiver IsBordersEnabled IsMutable bool default 1 If set to 1 the borders on the Remote Display Window will be enabled displayed If set to O the borders will be removed creating a borderless windows to display the Remote Computer desktop The default value is 1 the borders are enabled Rgreceiver IsSnapEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver IsSnapEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 as the Remote Display Window is being positioned on the display the window will snap to the edge of the screen when the top edge of the window moves within 10 pixels of the top of the display or when the left edge of the window moves within 10 pixels of the left edge of the display The default value is 1 snap is enabled Rgreceiver IsAlwaysPromptCredentialsEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver IsAlwaysPromptCredentialsEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 when connecting to an RGS Sender the user will always be prompted for the domain username and password There will be no attempt to automatically verify the user credentials The default value is O prompting for credentials is off Rgreceiver Directory string directory txt Rgreceiver Directory IsMut
223. or USB devices are Local Remote csc ceccaesicedescuss xaos ctedaaasd eodadedsceunnaszaweeesenignartosaaticd esate see kodeedwecaesiatnnatlasentidbietsh 34 Configurations supporting remote USB cccccccecccccece ee eeeeee cece eee eeeeeeee se eeeeeeeee sae eeeeeessaeeeeeeeaaaee es 35 RGS audio subsystem on WindoWsS ssss ssssenssssiinsssrirsssrissssrerssrerrssrrrrssrrrrsssrresssrerrsrressreressen 36 RGS audio subsystem on Linux ictnccsesincestasacsecedamnyaestaeaedsedsentosteuedonesddsanpearewcadseedduansyarsacsbadeeoneassant 38 Configurations that support remote audio sssssssnnsssssiisssssriirsssrriresssrrrrrsrsrrrrrrsrerrrrresrriresresn 4 Remolie Clipboard Operaio sessserireecirnr a E R E REA 42 Enabling Remote Clipboard during Sender and Receiver installation on Microsoft Windows systems 43 Receiver Remote USB configuration didhog cccccccccccccceseeeeceeee see eeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeaaaeees 48 Remote Clipboard Configuration dialog wisaicecccssennesonsnsssncaabueseasabundianaidaseassavusieasieaneepiscsaasadiuenetiedee 48 Dialog to enable or disable Remote USB in the Sender ccccccceccceceeeseceeeeeeceeesseeceeesseeeeeesaeeeeeeas 52 Dialog to enable Single Sign On or Easy LOgin ccccccccccceeccceeeeeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeas 53 Configuration of the RGS Sender license cccccccccceseeececeeee se eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeeeaaeeeeeess
224. or OlE2 object descriptor Link Source Descriptor link to OLE2 object HTML Format lext is in Hypertext Markup Language format Rich Text Format A text format that includes special formatting features such as bold italics and centering e XML Spreadsheet A format created by Microsoft to allow Excel spreadsheets to be saved in XML Extensible Markup Language format This format is supported by other applications as well The Remote Clipboard system uses the filter string to avoid transmission of unneeded clipboard formats across the network only formats specitied by the filter string are passed over the network from the cut computer to the paste receiving computer Because the filter string is an RGS Receiver specified property and because the paste computer can be any computer RGS Sender or Receiver RGS communicates the filter string from the RGS Receiver to each RGS Sender whenever a Receiver Sender connection is established see Figure 6 29 Figure 6 29 Transmission of the filter string property from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender The filter string is set by the Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString property RGS Sender 1 RGS Receiver RGS Sender 2 The Remote Clipboard filter string is sent from the RGS Receiver to the RGS Sender when each RGS connection session is established 6 6 3 Using the RGS log to detect clipboard problems As described in the next section Receiver and Sender lo
225. or later V5 update Matrix SP3 32 BIT X64 Enterprise 32 bit 64 bit 2 or later 64 bit Blade Clients FF Blade Worsten FP Bade FC vorSsener Desktops Personal Workstations HP only customer contigurea Dekap FCS ee Notebook PCs RGS overview 41 2 18 Remote Clipboard overview Remote Clipboard was originally supported with RGS 5 1 3 enabling the user to cut or copy data between a window on the Local Computer the Local Window and a Remote Display Window provided that both the Remote and Local Computers are running Windows and the applications being used support cut and paste and copy and paste Beginning with RGS 5 3 0 Remote Clipboard cut and paste of ANSI text data is supported between Microsoft Windows Receiver systems and Linux Sender systems f NOTE For simplicity the phrase cut and paste is used subsequently to refer to both cut and paste as well as copy and paste At RGS 5 2 support was added for cut and paste between two Remote Display Windows see Figure 2 25 Figure 2 25 Remote Clipboard operation Remote Display Local Wind Window 1 a f Ese Ra EASES lt ms Calo e 8 598335 A B Cc E JAN FEB MAR __ MAY 28495 38755 57489 84753 25614 18723 39845 92745 92884 87134 28556 398745 _ 89234 38472 27955 4893 m 12653 87133 2985 28745 28371 98734 93853 9876 an Recipient m lt Nam
226. ort for the sender process If a different window manager is in use that file must be manually configured The rgsender_contig_64 rpm provides an automated way to handle the standard customizations described below This is especially useful for network or unattended installations requiring default PAM authentication settings The rpm can also be run independently of the install script NOTE This automated step must be performed after any actions that install their own X server configuration files because in step a above these files are modified to load the rge module required for proper Sender functionality If these files are replaced or modified later the modules modifications described below must be correctly executed If you choose not to use the customization described in step 5 or have a different configuration file that needs to be updated perform the following steps to update the respective configuration a Add the rge extension to the X Server configuration file Edit the etc X11 XF86Config etc X11 XF86Config 4 or the appropriate XF86Config file on your system for XFree86 X servers Edit the xorg conf file for X Org X Servers In the Modules section of this file add the following line Load rge The Module section should now read as follows Section Module Load rge EndSection The Sender will be installed to opt hpremote rgsender and will be started automatically when the X Server or system is restarted
227. ot already exist This can be done through the use of regedit as well Create the key as type RGS_ SZ a string type The full path of the key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender GinaD11Mode Installing RGS 63 6 To actually enable Easy Login set the value of the GinaD11Mode key to the text HprEasyLogin Confirm the spelling before closing Figure 3 16 shows the registry key contents Figure 3 16 Addition of the GinaDllMode key to the registry 4 Remote Graphics Sender lab cin aDIIMode REG SZ HprEasy Login 7 Restart the computer The hprgina d11 module will be loaded by WinLogon when started Summary If the GinaDLL key does not currently exist in the registry Microsoft s default GINA DLL msgina d11 is loaded by WinLogon Adding the GinaDLL registry key and setting its value to hprgina dl1l informs WinLogon to load the hprgina d11 instead of the default msgina dll The hprgina module is a chaining GINA DLL When the RGS hprgina d11 is loaded by WinLogon the hprgina module loads the msgina d11 shared library The hprgina module chains forwards all GINA requests to the msgina d11 module Chaining custom GINA modules for Easy Login If it is determined in step 3 above that the GinaDLL registry key does exist and the value of the key is not msgina d11 then a custom GINA module is currently loaded and being used by WinLogon Custom GINA modules provide custom authentication dialogs or even c
228. ote Computer frame buffer requires two monitors to view the Windows desktop 0seseeeeeees 28 Figure 2 14 A Remote Display Window spanning two monitors ccccecesseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaeneeeeeeeaaeneeees 28 Figure 2 15 Each Remote Display Window can be positioned to occupy a single monitor ccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeees 29 Figure 2 16 Image quality slide bar in the Remote Display Window Toolbar ccccccceesseeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeees 30 Figure 2 17 Remote Computer can access the local USB devices cccceccseeecceceeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaaaneeees 31 Figure 2 18 The local USB devices can be attached to only one Remote Computer at a time ceccceesseeeeeeees 31 Figure 2 20 Receiver installation dialog to specify the Remote USB Configuration ccccccccccceeseeceeeeeeuseeeeeees 32 Figure 2 21 USB device accessibility for the setting USB devices are Local Remote cccseeeeeeceeeeeeeesseeeeeees 33 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 4 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 4 4 Figure 4 5 Figure 4 6 Figure 4 7 Smartcard reader accessibility pre and post RGS connection for settings USB devices are Remote
229. ote Computer monitor blanking operation For an overview of Remote Computer monitor blanking see Section 2 13 Remote Computer monitor blanking overview Monitor blanking on the Remote Computer is provided for security so that the primary user s desktop session on the Remote Computer is not visible if a monitor is connected to the Remote Computer Monitor blanking is supported on all Windows computers that support gamma On these computers the default behavior is that the Remote Computer monitor will blank to black when the user connects and logs in The Remote Computer monitor will unblank when the user disconnects or logs out Below are several additional details on monitor blanking on HP xw Personal Workstations e The one element on the monitor that does not go blank is the cursor e Blanking can take up to two seconds from the time the primary user logs in or reconnects until the time that the monitor is actually blanked e The HP xw Personal Workstations also block input from a directly connected keyboard and mouse when monitor blanking is occurring When keyboard or mouse input is received by the Remote Computer the monitor will enter the display powersave mode and the cursor will be blanked as a result e An exception to input blocking is the CTRL ALT DEL key sequence When this sequence is received by the Remote Computer from a directly connected keyboard the Remote Computer desktop will display the login dialog on the
230. out modifications Graphics acceleration hardware Performance is enhanced because the applications running on the Remote Computer use its graphics acceleration hardware HP compression decompression algorithms Proprietary high pertormance HP image compression decompression algorithms enable real time remote visualization that is visually lossless and highly interactive Selective screen updates Only those portions of the screen which change are captured compressed and transmitted from the Remote Computer to the Local Computer further improving performance Security RGS supports many security features including encryption of the pixel data sent from the Remote Computer to the Local Computer Collaboration Multiple users can simultaneously connect to the same Remote Computer allowing the users to view and interact with the same desktop session and applications 1 4 Additional RGS features RGS provides many additional features including 3D application support Users can interact with OpenGL 3D applications running on the Remote Computer Direct3D applications can be used as well provided they are not in full screen mode 3D applications use the full power of graphics acceleration hardware on the Remote Computer Remote USB USB devices connected to the Local Computer can be attached to and accessed by the Remote Computer Remote Audio Smooth continuous low latency high quality remote audio is transmitted from t
231. out property to determine the connectivity loss and fully terminate the connection During the time from the actual network disruption until the Sender error timeout expires the Sender will not send image updates to other Receivers if the Server is serving multiple Receiver connections This will impact the interactivity of other users for no apparent reason After the Sender error timeout expires the Sender will terminate the faulty connection and continue updating the other Receivers Advanced capabilities 121 Network timeout issues Listed below are several timeoutrelated issues and their potential causes Remote Display Window repeatedly dims and displays a connection warning message This is likely caused by frequent network disruptions between the Receiver and Sender The dimming of the display serves as a notification to the user that the Remote Display Window may contain stale information If frequent notifications are annoying and the network issues do not improve see the section Using Timeouts and adjust the Receiver s warning timeout value found on the Receiver Control Panel or the property Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning The Remote Display Window dims the Receiver disconnects and displays a Connection closed error dialog but the user can often immediately connect again Most likely the network connectivity between the Receiver and Sender was temporarily lost Other possible problems include e The Send
232. over the manual method described next 3 Manually enabling Easy Login Although the manual method is not the preferred method to enable Easy Login it is provided so that administrators will know exactly what parts of the operating system are being modified To manually enable WinLogon to load the hprgina d11 module perform the following steps 1 Install the Sender on the HP workstation If the RGS Sender is not installed or installs with errors do not perform the remaining steps Doing so will put the computer in a state that requires a complete re installation of the operating system 2 After the RGS Sender is installed confirm that hprgina dl11 exists in the C WINDOWS system32 directory The Sender installer copies hprgina d11 directly into the system32 directory ee IMPORTANT If the hprgina d11 does not exist in C WINDOWS system32 do not perform the remaining steps Doing so will put the system in a state that requires a complete re installation of the operating system 3 Add the GinaDLL registry key if it does not already exist This can be done through the use of regedit the Windows Registry Editor Create the key as type REG_SZ a string type The full path of the key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Winlogon GinaDLL 4 Set the value of the GinaDLL key to the text hprgina dll as shown in Figure 3 14 Confirm the spelling before closing 5 Add the GinaD11Mode registry key if does n
233. ows the connection A question dialog stating the domain and user name of the local user attempting a connection is displayed on the Remote Computer desktop when a local user attempts to connect see Figure 5 17 All currently connected local users will also see this dialog because they are currently viewing the Remote Computer desktop Figure 5 17 Primary user dialog to authorize a local user to connect to the primary user s desktop HP Remote Graphics Sender The different cases for establishing a collaborative session are e f no one is logged into the Remote Computer desktop in other words there is no primary user all authenticated users are connected and can view the Windows login desktop However when any one user logs into the Remote Computer desktop and therefore becomes the primary user all other authenticated users who are viewing the Windows login desktop will be disconnected as a security precaution e If the primary user authorizes a connection from a local user the new user connects to the Remote Computer and can view its desktop e If the primary user does not allow the connection the new user will be unable to connect e On Windows if the primary user disconnects the desktop is locked but the Receivers will remain connected e On Linux if the primary user disconnects the desktop is locked and all users are disconnected e Ifthe local user connecting to the primary user s computer is the same use
234. p the Remote Computers assigned to the user If a file is not specified the user is prompted to enter a path to the directory file For information on Directory Mode see Chapter 7 Using Directory Mode nosplash Disables display of the splash screen when the Receiver starts v ver version Displays the Receiver version information h help Displays the Receiver command line options that are listed on this page Rgreceiver propertyname value Can be used to specify one or more RGS Receiver properties See Chapter 8 RGS properties for general information on RGS properties For information specifically on RGS Receiver properties see Section 8 5 RGS Receiver properties Using RGS 80 After the Receiver starts you ll see the Receiver Control Panel see Figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 Receiver Control Panel HP Remote Graphics Receiver Hostname 15 2 76 29 About setup Made Help UU q eer ACIVanced gt gt gt To create an RGS connection enter the hostname or IP address of the Remote Computer in the Hostname dialog box and press Enter or click Connect NOTE At RGS 5 2 5 the capability was added to specify the port number used by the RGS Sender The detault Sender port number is 42966 The Sender port number can be changed using the Rgsender Network Port property If this property is used to change the Sender port number from its default value of 42966 the Sender port n
235. paste oo eee ccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeees 132 Figure 6 32 Options available under the Logging tab sic a2itoeasseaceraiedans im deve te ieee loader eae hes 133 FIGUIG70 3 9 dog SETUP TING lt 4iarnasciaholchoastenasathaatsdadaietw N N 134 Figure 6 34 Options available under the Statistics tab cccccccsesseeecccsensseeccessaeseeecccccesserscensegesercensaeeses 135 Figure 7 1 staring th Receiver in Directory Wode a2 2 5 2 ne 5 10s a ee ais Senet ance ane 137 Figure 7 2 The Receiver Control Panel in Directory Mode c ccccccccseeeeceee ee eeeeeee cece ee eeee seca sae eeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeegaaenes 137 Figure 7 3 Remote Display Window selection dialog s c 0 issn bois eee a ee 138 Pigure O7 li Receiver propeny hierarchy scesu hata Seal ct atts el saat a ene Dia es 14 Figures 9 Figure 8 2 The Receiver timeout error IsMutable property is set to O ccccccccceeccccceeeeeeeeeueeeceeeseeeeeesseeeeesaeeeess 144 Figure 8 3 The Receiver timeout error property Menu is grayed OUt ccecccccsseesceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesseeeeseesaeeeeeeaaeess 144 Figure 8 4 The Receiver maintains a list of the most recently connected Senders cccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 145 Figure 8 5 Prior to RGS 5 1 3 only one image update would be in process at any tiMe cccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee es 148 Figure 8 6 Sequence chart for the default property value Of 4 oo ccccccccccceeeececceeeaeeeeeeeeessee
236. pendix C Linux remote audio device support As shown in Figure 2 23 an audio device is required to be installed in Linux based Remote Computers in order for application generated audio to be sent to the Local Computer Furthermore the audio device installed in the Remote Computer must have the ability to record from a control that is the mix of all audio signals On a Windows computer by way of comparison this control is often called Stereo Mix Linux however does not follow a standard naming convention for this control hence the need to evaluate individual audio devices to determine their suitability for use on Linux Listed below are the PCI audio cards with their on card model numbers that are known to work on Linux based HP xw Personal Workstations operating as Remote Computers SoundBlaster Audigy 4 SBO660 SoundBlaster Audigy 4 SB0610 SoundBlaster Audigy 2ZS SBO350 SoundBlaster Live CT4780 In addition the following HP xw Personal Workstations have audio hardware on the motherboard that is suitable for generating remote audio on Linux based Remote Computers xw4200 xw6200 xw8 200 xw4300 xw4550 z400 z600 z800 Appendix C Linux remote audio device support 196
237. phone is disabled off muted The default value is 1 remote microphone is enabled on unmuted RGS properties 160 8 6 4 Sender network timeout properties Rgsender Network Timeout Error int 30000 The timeout in milliseconds used to detect and disconnect an inactive connection The default value is 30 000 milliseconds 30 seconds See Section 6 4 Network timeouts for more details Rgsender Network Timeout Dialog int 15000 The timeout in milliseconds used to display and wait on responses from input dialogs such as the authorization dialog and PAM authentication dialog The default value is 15 000 milliseconds 15 seconds See Section 6 4 Network timeouts for more details 8 6 5 Sender USB access control list properties The following properties provide information on the access control list ACL file used to control the attachment of USB devices to a Remote Computer See Section 6 3 5 Remote USB Access Control List for information on the ACL file Rgsender Usb Acl RulesetPath string hprDefaultUsbAcl1 xml This property specifies the name of the XML file that implements the remote USB Access Control List ACL Rgsender Usb Acl SchemaPath string hprUsbAcl xsd This property specifies the name of the schema file that accompanies the remote USB XML file Rgsender Usb Acl RulesetErrorTimeout int 5000 This property is used by the Sender remote USB code while monitoring the ACL file n
238. port host must be in the form of port host The port and the trailing are optional in which case the default port is used for the given host Only one of rgslicenseserver or rgslicensefile may be specified Installing RGS 66 rgslicensefile lt filename gt The license to run the RGS Sender is acquired from the specified file The filename may be omitted by specifying the option as rgslicensefile in which case the Sender will be installed without a license and the license file can be manually copied to the install folder at a later time Only one of rgslicenseserver or rgslicensefile may be specified If neither rgslicenseserver or rgslicensefile are specitied the install will proceed as if this option was specified without a filename noreboot Do not reboot the system when the setup requires a reboot to complete removesettings Removes the user specific Receiver settings from the registry viewlicense Displays the EULA End User License Agreement for use of this software help Display usage text Sender installation log file on Windows As with installation of the Receiver installation of the Sender also creates an installation log file This log file can be viewed by the user to obtain details about what operations were performed and view any errors that occurred during the installation process When Setup exe for the RGS Sender is run the following log file is created C TEMP rgsenderInstaller
239. prDefaultUsbAc1 xm1 If this tile disappears or otherwise becomes inaccessible while the Sender is running this property controls how long the Sender waits for the file to be restored If the timeout expires all currently connected USB devices are disconnected If the file is restored prior to expiration of the timeout period the USB devices remain connected The detault timeout value is 5 000 milliseconds 5 seconds 8 6 6 Sender NIC binding properties The following properties permit control of which NIC the RGS Sender binds to Use of the NIC binding properties is described in Section 4 3 2 NIC recontiguration using the NIC binding properties Rgsender Network IsListenOnAllInterfacesEnabled bool 0 This property can be used to force the Sender to listen for RGS connections on all NICs The default value is O do not force the Sender to listen for RGS connections on all available NICs Rgsender Network Interface n IsEnabled int see below for default values This property can be used to specify the NIC that the Sender will listen on The n in the property name specifies the index of the NIC beginning at O for the first NIC 1 for the second NIC and so on If this property value is 1 enabled the Sender will listen on the NIC of index n If the property is O the Sender will not listen on that NIC If Rgsender Network IsListenOnAllInterfacesEnabled 1 this property is ignored and the Sender will listen for RGS co
240. processing Therefore the keyboard and mouse cannot be readily used to interact with the locally displayed Remote Display Window To address this situation RGS provides Setup Mode In Setup Mode transmission of keyboard and mouse events to the Remote Computer is suspended instead the keyboard and mouse can be used to interact with the Remote Display Window on the Local Computer In Setup Mode you can perform a number of operations including e Move a borderless Remote Display Window e Raise a particular Remote Display Windows that is being obscured by another Remote Display Window Using RGS 82 E NOTE In Normal Mode only a single Remote Display Window can be displayed on the Local Computer Displaying multiple Remote Display Windows on the Local Computer requires using Directory Mode see Chapter 7 Using Directory Mode Setup Mode can be activated in two ways e By clicking the Setup Mode button on the Receiver Control Panel see Figure 5 2 This presumes of course that the Receiver Control Panel is visible e By typing a special key sequence on the keyboard called a hotkey sequence The hotkey sequence method of activating Setup Mode is required in situations where for example the Remote Display Window is borderless and is covering the entire Local Computer monitor including the Receiver Control Panel Because the Receiver Control Panel is obscured its Setup Mode button is inaccessible The default hotkey sequen
241. propertyname value Can be used to specify one or more RGS Sender properties See Chapter 8 RGS properties for general information on RGS properties For information specifically on RGS Sender properties see Section 8 6 RGS Sender properties regedit can be used to modify the parameters that are used for starting the Sender by the Sender service as follows 1 Start regedit This can be done by opening a Windows command prompt and executing the command regedit or using the run command line from the Start menu 2 Using regedit navigate to the key HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet Services rgsender 3 Add the desired process priority command line option for starting the Remote Graphics Sender service For example to increase the process priority to high add the high option to the key ImagePath as follows C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender rgsendersvc exe 1 logSetup high 4 Restart the Sender service with the new option This can be done using the Windows Service Control Manager see Manually starting and stopping the Sender on Windows or by re starting the computer The Sender GUI on Windows The Windows Sender displays the HP Remote Graphics Software icon in the application tray On Windows the icon animates when Receivers are connected to the Sender Right click on the icon to display the Sender GUI see Figure 3 8 Figure 3 8 Sender GUI Remote Keybo
242. r RGS properties 159 Rgsender IsCollaborationNotificationEnabled bool 1 Introduced at RGS 5 2 0 this property allows the user to enable or disable display of the collaboration notification dialog see Section 5 5 2 Collaboration notification dialog If set to 1 the collaboration notification dialog is displayed If set to O the collaboration notification dialog is not displayed The default value is 1 display the collaboration notification dialog CAUTION Caution is advised in disabling the collaboration notification dialog because neither the Remote User if present or the Local Users will be notified who is participating in a collaboration session Furthermore if display of the collaboration notification dialog is disabled the warning dialog in Figure 5 7 which is displayed when the Remote Computer is unable to blank its monitor will also be prevented from being displayed Rgsender IsReconnectOnConsoleDisconnectEnabled bool 1 Introduced at RGS 5 3 0 this property allows the user to enable or disable session reconnection during session logout or Fast User Switching Supported on Windows Vista and later The default value is 1 See Sender and Receiver interoperability for more details 8 6 3 Sender microphone property Rgsender Mic IsEnabled bool 1 This property is new with RGS 5 1 3 and is only supported on the Windows Sender If set to 1 remote microphone is enabled on unmuted If set to O remote micro
243. r Browser IsMutable bool 1 This property only applies to the Linux RGS Receiver If set to 1 the name of the browser used to display online help can be changed by the user in the Receiver Control panel If set to O the name of the browser cannot be changed by the user Rgreceiver Browser Name string mozilla Rgreceiver Browser Name IsMutable bool 1 This property only applies to the Linux RGS Receiver and can be used to set the name of the browser to display online help For example setting Rgreceiver Browser Name mozilla will start the Mozilla browser when the Help button is clicked in the Receiver Control Panel For the Windows Receiver the Help system is based on a CHM file which is displayed by the hh exe program RGS properties 150 8 5 5 Receiver audio properties Rgreceiver Audio IsMutable bool 1 If set to 1 the user will be able to modify all audio controls in the RGS Receiver If set to O none of the audio controls can be modified by the user The default value is 1 the audio controls can be modified by the user Rgreceiver Audio IsEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver Audio IsEnabled IsMutable bool 1 If set fo 1 the RGS audio subsystem will be enabled If set to 0 RGS audio will be disabled and no network bandwidth will be consumed for remote audio The default value is 1 audio is enabled Rgreceiver Audio Quality int 1 Rgreceiver Audio Quality IsMutable bool 1 The audio quality property can be set to
244. r as the primary user the collaboration dialog is not displayed and the connection is allowed On Windows the Sender desktop icon in the system application tray displays the status of connections The icon animates when Receivers are connected On Linux the Sender GUI is present on the desktop and displays connection status All Receivers can be easily disconnected from the HP Remote Graphics icon located in the system tray or from the Sender GUI by right clicking on the icon or GUI This is useful when hosting collaborative session such as in a classroom environment and the session ends 5 5 2 Collaboration notitication dialog The Windows Sender displays a collaboration notification dialog when non primary users are connected This Sender created dialog appears in each Remote Display Window that is connected to the Sender The dialog displays a list of domain usernames for each user connected to the Remote Computer see Figure 5 18 Figure 5 18 Collaboration notification dialog displayed on the Sender and in each Remote Display Window When the collaboration notification dialog is displayed it indicates there are multiple connections to the Remote Computer desktop Primary and non primary users are identified using different fonts in the notification dialog The primary user is italicized and listed first Non primary usernames follow and are displayed using a normal font Figure 5 18 shows three active connections one a primary user
245. r to view the primary NVIDIA frame buffer because the video signal from the NVIDIA graphics adapter is not available on a connector the contents of the frame buffer can only be viewed remotely using RGS E NOTE For clarity in this guide the bitmapped image contained in the Remote Computer frame buffer will often be shown in association with the Remote Computer independent of whether a monitor is actually connected or can be connected to the Remote Computer 2 8 2 One to one connection The simplest RGS connection is a single Local Computer making a connection to a single Remote Computer The entire frame buffer of the Remote Computer is displayed in a window on the Local Computer see Figure 2 5 The window on the Local Computer is called the Remote Display Window Figure 2 5 Display of the Remote Computer frame buffer on the Local Computer Local Computer Remote Computer Receiver Sender The entire frame buffer of the Remote Computer is mapped to a window on the Local Computer called the Remote Display Window In Figure 2 5 the Remote Computer frame buffer fits completely within the Remote Display Window on the Local Computer monitor However it is possible for the Remote Computer frame buffer size to exceed the size of the Local Computer monitor as measured in horizontal pixels by vertical pixels As before the Remote Display Window will be the size of the Remote Computer frame buffer If the Remote Display Windo
246. raries must be HP supported or Red Hat Enterprise Linux release 4 or greater versions for best results Manual installation of prior ALSA libraries may yield unpredictable results on older releases of Linux Do not mix versions of ALSA software If multiple audio devices are installed in a system administrators should identify the target audio system prior to installing the included ALSA software Properly configured kernel headers for the running kernel must be available from the directory lib modules lt version gt build for proper installation The example installation script provided only builds installs for the currently active kernel The installation and configuration scripts require administrator privileges on the target system If you cannot become root on your system ask an administrator for assistance System Preparation HP recommends that you remove all previously installed versions of JACK before installation If the RPM package manager was utilized then the packages can be located by rpm qa grep i jack Removal by RPM involves utilizing the above search results with rpm e nodeps allmatches pkg name The install script rgs_ audio support may detect residual directories from previous installations Respond as prompted during installation Customized Audio Installation The following remote audio installation process for Linux is used when the RGS Receiver is installed through the install sh script For those ins
247. re 6 17 Figure 6 17 Checkbox to enable Remote USB General Network Hotkeys Logging Statistics Enable Remote USB select sender y Advanced capabilities 115 HP Remote Virtual USB Driver Verify that the HP Remote Virtual USB driver is installed and active on the Remote Computer Open the Windows Device Manager and verify that HP Remote Virtual USB is listed under Universal Serial Bus Controllers see Figure 6 18 Figure 6 18 HP Remote Virtual USB driver Device Manager File Action view Help i es Bie e 2 eS Floppy disk controllers HA Floppy disk drives HE IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Se Keyboards amp 0 Mice and other pointing devices E Monitors Network adapters oY Ports COM amp LPT ae Processors Sound video and game controllers H System devices El Universal Serial Bus controllers l HF Remote virtual USB Intelri 826501DB6 DEM USB 2 0 Enhanced Host Controller 24CD Intelfr 628010B 06M USB Universal Host Controller 2402 Inteli 828010B 06M USE Universal Host Controller 2404 Intel r 8280106 06M USB Universal Host Controller 2477 USE Rook Hub USE Rook Hub USE Rook Hub USE Rook Hub If the HP Remote Virtual USB driver is not reported reinstall the RGS Sender software During installation verify that the Remote USB box is checked in the Configuration window see Figure 6 19 Figure 6 19 Enable installation of remote USB Remote Graphics Sen
248. re on your client computer a Locate the RGS Receiver configuration file rgreceiverconfig at C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Receiver Right click on the file and remove the Read Only property b Edit the rgreceiverconfig file by un commenting and modifying the following line to have a value of 1 Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled 1 c Save the rgreceivercontig file E IMPORTANT Ensure that you remove the from all lines you wish to activate Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 188 3 Install the View Client on the client computer A 4 Running RGS diagnostics You should run the RGS diagnostics utility rgdiag exe following installation of the RGS Sender to determine what additional OS configuration needs to be done to properly support RGS in the VDI environment OS contiguration typically includes the following e Firewall configuration to allow rgsender exe to pass through e Simple file sharing mode unset e Using regedt32 set registry key HKEY_ LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Winlogon AllowMultipleTSSessions to O zero For information on running rgdiag exe see the section Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows A 5 Disabling the RGS warning popup RGS alerts the user when the main console is still viewable The hardware feature used for screen blanking is not available in VMware ESX virtual machines Therefore by default this warning messag
249. reate a new registry key ChainedGinaDLL with the value of the key containing the name of the chained custom GINA module Perform steps 1 6 shown above the restart will be done below plus the following three steps to chain custom modules 1 Create the ChainedGinaDLL registry key Create the key as type REG_SZ a string type The full path of the key is HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender ChainedGinaDLL 2 Set the value of the new ChainedGinaDLL key to the name of the custom GINA module For example if the name of the custom GINA module is foogina d11 then the value of the key should be foogina d1l The value should match the string originally discovered in the registry key GinaDLL Confirm the spelling before closing 3 Restart the computer When the RGS hprgina d11 is loaded by WinLogon hprgina d11 will load the chained GINA module foogina d1l The hprgina module then chains all GINA requests to the foogina d11 module If the custom foogina d11 is also a chaining GINA module foogina d11 in turn chains itself to the msgina d11 module Three GINA DLLs will be loaded as part of the WinLogon exe process 1 hprgina dll 2 foogina dl1l and 3 msgina dll Installing RGS 64 3 1 2 1 Setting the Local Security Policy The local security policy Interactive logon Do not require CTRL ALT DEL must be disabled to support Easy Login This can be set in the Windows Local Security Settings under Secur
250. requests For example using the Rgsender Network Interface 1 IsEnabled property an administrator can specify that the RGS Sender will listen for connection requests on NIC 1 corresponding to Local Area Connection 4 even though NIC 1 is the second NIC in binding order Figure 4 6 NIC binding order numerical sequence Advanced Settings Adapters and Bindings Provider Order Connechons are fisted in the onder in which they are accessed by network services Connections S Local Area Connection 3 NIC 0 t 4 Local Area Connection4 NIC 1 le Remote Access connections 1 Again refer to Section 8 6 6 Sender NIC binding properties for a description of these properties Pre connection checklist 78 4 4 Using RGS through a firewall New at RGS 5 1 5 is the ability for the Receiver to use the public IP address of the Sender This feature has been added to allow RGS to be used through a firewall To take advantage of this feature the Sender and Receiver firewalls must both support NAT Network Address Translation In addition the Sender firewall must support port forwarding see Figure 4 7 Figure 4 7 RGS operation through a firewall lt lt sourde IP port dest IP port sdurce IP port dest IP port source IP port dest IP port 192 168 0 10 42966 192 168 0 1 678 15 2 A B 543 15 2 C D 678 192 168 0 1 543 192 168 0 5 3279 This port number can vary Firewa
251. required system environments and security features used and supported by RGS e Supported computers and operating systems e RGS version numbering e RGS licensing e _ RGS products e Sender and Receiver interoperability e Application support e Networking support RGS connection topologies e One to one e Many to one e One to many e RGS operating modes Multi monitor configurations Remote USB operation e Supported keyboards e Security features This chapter provides an overview of each of these features For a description of new features and other late breaking topics see the README txt file in the installation directory of either the RGS Receiver or RGS Sender The file is best viewed using Wordpad Microsoft Word or Openoffice swriter RGS overview 17 2 1 Supported computers and operating systems This section describes the computers and operating systems which support HP RGS 5 3 0 see Figure 2 1 Any RGS Sender can interoperate with any RGS Receiver Figure 2 1 Computers and operating systems that support RGS 5 3 0 Receiver Windows Windows XP Professional Windows Vista Business Embedded RHEL V4 update 5 or later V5 Support Matrix XPe WES SP1 SP2 SP3 32 BIT X64 re and Enterprise 32 bit Linux update 2 or later 32 bit 64 bit it Desktops Eee E Persona Workstations Mobile Workstations Desktop PCs Notebook PCs Performance Thin Clients HP GT7725 HP GI7720 HP GI7720w D Cw p H
252. rform the following four steps these steps are expanded on subsequently 1 Create a new virtual machine complete with OS and applications ee IMPORTANT When building a Virtual Machine for RGS in a VMware View environment the RGS Sender must be installed prior to View Agent installation 2 Install the RGS Sender and modify the Sender configuration file rgsendercontig to optimize VMware View operation 3 Install the View Agent as described in VMware View installation documentation 4 Install the RGS Receiver and the Client Agent on the client computer These steps are described in the next four sections Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 187 A 3 1 Create a new virtual machine Follow the procedure described in Section A 2 1 to create a new virtual machine complete with OS and applications A 3 2 Install the RGS Sender on View Master Parent VM and modify the configuration file to optimize for VMware View environment The RGS Sender configuration file rgsenderconfig must be modified to support RGS in a VMware View environment This is done as follows 1 Launch the RGS Sender install executable 2 During installation all but the following options may be kept at their default values a If you re using the VMware implementation of USB redirection do not enable RGS Remote USB b The initial release of VMware View 3 1 that supports RGS 5 2 5 does not support RGS Single Sign on or Easy Login do not select either of thes
253. rgadmin tool delete or rename the value of the GinaDLL registry key If there is no other custom GINA module on the computer simply removing the GinaDLL key definition from the registry entry below disables Single Sign on HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion Winlogon GinaDLL A CAUTION If the value of the GinaDLL key contains the name of a custom GINA DLL and the file does not exist in C WINDOWS system32 the computer will not start correctly after the next reboot The computer will then require a complete re installation of the operating system The GinaDLL key is removed using regedit the Windows Registry Editor Be sure to actually remove the key by selecting the GinaDLL key in regedit and select the Delete entry in the Edit menu Once the key is Installing RGS 62 deleted it will no longer show up as a key in the WinLogon subkey When the system reboots the default GINA module msgina d11 will be loaded by the WinLogon exe process If there is a custom GINA DLL module on the system and if it replaces the default msgina d11 change the value of the GinaDLL value from hprgina d11 to the name of the custom GINA module To change the value of the GinaDLL key select the GinaDLL key in regedit and then select the Modify entry in the Edit menu A dialog box appears allowing the value of the key to be changed Type the name of the custom GINA module in the Value data area Confirm that the custom GINA module
254. rosoft Windows Vista Figure 2 22 shows the RGS audio subsystem green boxes for Windows and the audio data paths these data paths are described in Table 2 1 Figure 2 22 RGS audio subsystem on Windows Windows Local Computer USB driver Windows Remote Computer RGS Audio Player HP Remote Microphone virtual device Application HP Remote Audio virtual device RGS Audio Recorder RGS Audio Recorder RGS Audio Player Path when USB devices are remote l usp gt microphone X Path when USB devices are local A analog microphone Microphone audio sent to the Remote Computer application Paths Playback of audio generated by the Remote Computer application Table 2 1 describes each of the audio data paths The numbering and lettering in the table correspond to the numbering and lettering in Figure 2 22 Table 2 1 Windows RGS audio data paths Audio Playback from the Remote Computer to the Local Sending of microphone audio from the Local Computer to Computer the Remote Computer RGS overview 36 Table 2 1 Windows RGS audio data paths Audio Playback from the Remote Computer to the Local Sending of microphone audio from the Local Computer to Computer the Remote Computer The application generated audio output If an audio device is installed the application generated audio is routed through it If there is no audio device
255. rs can be easily disconnected using the Sender GUI This is useful when hosting a collaboration session such as in a classroom environment and the session ends On Windows the Sender GUI is an icon in the system tray On Linux systems the GUI is an application on the desktop Simply right click on the GUI and select Disconnect All Receivers Remote Keyboard Mouse The Sender GUI can enable or disable mouse and keyboard input for all non primary users Single user connection A user identified by a username is only allowed one connection to a RGS Sender If the same username connects more than once to a Sender the previous connection drops and the new connection continues on If several users attempt to share a username only one connection is active at a time SSL encryption SSL securely encrypts all data transmitted between a Receiver and Sender pair RGS overview 46 3 Installing RGS This chapter describes the following aspects of installing RGS e Installing the RGS Receiver on Windows e Installing the RGS Sender on Windows e Installing the RGS Receiver on Linux e Installing the RGS Sender on Linux i IMPORTANT RGS licensing applies to the RGS Sender only The RGS Receiver is a free download and can be used on any number of computers Licensing of the RGS Sender on Windows and Linux is described in the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_ manuals Note that Sender licensing is
256. rs the following 1 Year RGS Software Assurance products for each of the above RGS products except the HP RGS Desktop Trial Edition e 1 Year RGS Software Assurance This product entitles you to upgrade to new major minor releases of RGS for one year from purchase date The software assurance can be renewed annually at 25 of the internet list price of a new license For more detailed information on the RGS products see the HP Remote Graphics Software QuickSpec available on the RGS homepage at www hp com go rgs RGS overview 20 2 5 Sender and Receiver interoperability RGS provides interoperability between versions of RGS Senders and Receivers that have the same major version number For example Sender version 5 0 and Receiver version 5 1 will interoperate together However Sender version 4 2 is not guaranteed to interoperate with Receiver version 5 0 Connection between a Receiver and a Sender should only be attempted when their major version numbers are the same Beginning with RGS 5 3 0 the Microsoft Windows Vista Sender added the capability to notify the Receiver prior to shutting down The Microsoft Windows Vista Sender must exit and then restart under several conditions such as login logoft fast user switching or Remote Desktop Protocol RDP transition This behavior allows the Receiver to automatically reconnect atter the Sender has restarted Receivers prior to 5 3 0 will show a pink or black screen and then a Reconnect dialog box if
257. s Using RGS 84 5 1 3 Remote Display Window Toolbar The Remote Display Window Toolbar provides information on the RGS connection and allows several RGS parameters to be controlled The toolbar is positioned at the top of the Remote Display Window see Figure 5 6 and is toggled on and off by pressing the H key while in Setup Mode In this particular case Setup Mode can be entered by either method the Setup Mode button or the hotkey sequence and the H key can be used to display the toolbar Figure 5 6 Remote Display Window Toolbar hostname or IP address of Remote Computer 16 125 22 84 gt 6 mi image quality 620 100 M Boost 11 kbits sec border button snap button Boost checkbox network bandwidth image update rate 3 Updates disconnect CTRL ALT DEL image quality slide bar button button The Remote Display Window Toolbar provides the following hostname The hostname or IP address of the Remote Computer disconnect button Disconnects the current RGS session CTRL ALT DEL button Sends the CTRL ALT DEL key sequence to the Remote Computer Some key sequences such as CTRL ALT DEL are trapped by the Local Computer and therefore are not forwarded to the Remote Computer This button allows the user to send a CTRL ALT DEL sequence to the Remote Computer without using the keyboard Borders button Adds or removes window borders and decorations on the Remote Display Window Snap button
258. s deleted it no longer shows up as a key in the WinLogon subkey When the system reboots the default GINA module msgina dl11 will be loaded by the WinLogon exe process If there is a custom GINA DLL module on the system and it replaces the default msgina d11 change the value of the GinaDLL value from hprgina d11 to the name of the custom GINA module To change the value of the GinaDLL key select the GinaDLL key in regedit and then select the Modify entry in the Edit menu A dialog box appears allowing the value of the key to be changed Type the name of the custom GINA module in the Value data area Confirm that the custom GINA module entered actually exists on the system in C WINDOWS system32 When the system reboots the custom GINA module is loaded by the WinLogon exe process Installing RGS 65 Automatic installation of the RGS Sender on Windows The RGS Sender can be installed or removed in automatic mode Automatic mode allows the Sender to be installed or removed without any user interaction Automatic mode will also restart the computer if required after the installation process completes Should an illegal combination of command line options be specified or if an error occurs during the install process the install will abort and the error will be logged to the Sender installation log file Usage Setup exe autoinstall agreetolicense folder lt folder gt usb remotemic clipboard sso el gina lt fi
259. s and that the local user enters the key sequence CTRL ALT DELETE in a Remote Display Window for the purpose of logging into the Remote Computer However instead of forwarding this key sequence to the Remote Computer Windows on the Local Computer will respond to these keys and bring up the Windows Security dialog on the Local Computer This checkbox can be used to circumvent this behavior When checked the local user can enter the key sequence CTRL ALT END in a Remote Display Window The Receiver recognizes CTRL ALT END as a signal to send a CTRL ALT DELETE sequence directly to the Remote Computer The CTRL ALT DELETE sequence can also be sent using the Remote Display Window Toolbar Send First Key This checkbox controls how the Receiver responds to a key sequence For example the default Setup Mode hotkey consists of a shift press space press and space release When the Receiver sees a shift key press this key event is not immediately sent to the Remote Computer Instead the Receiver retains the event to determine if the next keystroke forms a hotkey sequence If the next key pressed is not space the Receiver immediately forwards all key events to the Remote Computer Some user applications in order to function correctly require that the first key press event arrive separately from subsequent key events If this is the case check the Send First Key checkbox to enable the immediate transmission of the first key in a hotkey sequence to the R
260. s appropriate to your requirements as follows a Enable Remote USB Check this box if USB devices attached to the Local Computer need to be accessible by the Remote Computer For further information see Section 2 16 Remote USB overview b Enable Remote Microphone Check this box to enable remote microphone Remote microphone is not supported on Microsoft Windows Vista therefore this option is not available on Windows Vista For further information see Section 2 17 Remote audio overview c Enable Remote Clipboard Check this box if your Local Users will need Remote Clipboard capability For further information see Section 2 18 Remote Clipboard overview d I m not sure want more information For further information check this box and click Next Figure 3 3 Dialog to enable or disable Remote USB in the Sender Remote Graphics Sender InstallShield Wizard Remote Graphics Sender Configuration Please select the options you would like to enable in the Remote Graphics Sender Mi Enable Remote USB E Enable Remote Microphone Mi Enable Remote Clipboard IE I m not sure want more information Install il ee cancel Installing RGS 52 NOTE For many USB devices the Windows operating system provides default USB drivers While these default drivers may in fact work with your USB devices it is recommended that you install the manufacturer supplied USB drivers to optimize functionality and performa
261. s can be done by consulting one of the many USB ID lists There are documents that contain most of the registered Vendor IDs and Device IDs There are different documents that contain the different registered classes and subclasses By comparing the values of the device to these documents the user can verify that they are looking at the correct device and not some other device that is also plugged into the system The linux usb group keeps an up to date list of registered USB Vendor IDs and Device IDs This document resides on the www linux usb org site at www linux usb org usb ids Advanced capabilities 113 The registered classes and subclasses are documented by the USB Device Working Group The DWG s latest document for 1 0 defined class codes is hosted at www usb org developers defined_class 6 3 7 Troubleshooting remote USB If you have problems connecting a remote USB device from a Local Computer to a Remote Computer the following checklist may help identify the problem Computers supporting remote USB Ensure that both the Remote Computer and the Local Computer support remote USB see Section 2 16 5 Computers supporting remote USB Supported USB devices Verity that the USB device you re using is supported HP has tested a number of USB devices to verify they work correctly when attached to a Remote Computer from a Local Computer See Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS for a list of supported USB devices Che
262. sabled overlay surfaces it may display incorrectly If this is the case check to see if your OpenGL application provides a mechanism for the user fo manually disable the use of overlay surtaces RGS overview 29 2 15 Image quality RGS provides high quality high performance image compression and decompression Image compression is performed on the Remote Computer to reduce the network bandwidth requirements this enables RGS to be used on standard networks Image decompression is performed on the Local Computer RGS supports setting of the Image quality on a per Receiver basis Image quality is adjusted using the slide bar in the Remote Display Window Toolbar see Figure 2 15 As the image quality is increased toward 100 the amount of compression decreases and the required network bandwidth increases If a Receiver is supporting multiple Remote Display Windows see Section 2 8 3 Many to one connection the slide bar in any Remote Display Window Toolbar can be adjusted the slide bars in the other Remote Display Windows will automatically track The Boost checkbox was added beginning with RGS 5 2 6 and requires that both the RGS Sender and Receiver be version 5 2 6 or later Checking the Boost checkbox will improve boost image quality for certain types of images primarily images containing significant amounts of text or lines For further information see Section 5 1 3 Remote Display Window Toolbar Figure 2 15 Image qual
263. seeteauatsscdsseaseatewsnlastesieneceh 33 2 16 5 Computers supporting remote USB ccccceecee cence cece cece eee eee e eee e eee ce ees eeaeeeeeeee esse eeaeeeeneeenegs 35 2 16 6 Supported USB GeV CSS xicacsassececnnamcsnnntesdadonses wade nsatdansenessensenevieabonescmsscnesbedasanoeeasaebenbaseanacic 35 2 17 RE MIO Le OU GO OVS aane a E E E E E A EE E EE AO 35 2 17 1 Remote audio on Windows ssssssnnuesssseneesssseesssssrtrnresttrrrsesterrsssstetesssstrerssssserressssrrersst 36 2 17 2 Remote audio on WIG oo teds ccc Gentes wo omoceniecsnane asietoSareccsbodensoestingwideeententoiesae veacGansene tamdaseeatoobestett 38 2 17 3 Support of sound recording devices on Microsoft Windows XP Professional c cccceesseeeeeeees 40 2 17 4 Computers and operating systems which support RGS audio ccccceeccceesseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 4 2 18 Remote Clipboard overview arorcaces ccna sesserenatanssecaenn eiecaene lt qeaenosetaeecoiezsaee ape manedeasesaceaeeneaaoie 42 2 19 Interoperability of RGS and Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection ccccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 44 2 20 Using RGS with desktop virtualization wossns s2c122cdeaosanhesndasneecicpaaetaranescogczaubeneemoasiceedetobatactianena 44 2 21 Remote Computer power SAVING states ccc ceec cece cece eee ee ee ee ee eece cena eee eeaeeeeeese esse ees eeaneeenenes 45 2 22 Supported keyboard locales sesp5 sect ascecatcecncere anandcceaan lectesuaassec
264. sional using standard VMware procedures Install any desired Windows XP Professional OS patches Install all required user applications Es NOTE For best RGS performance HP recommends 2 vCPUs 2 3 4 Shut down the virtual machine Appendix A Using RGS with HP VDI 184 A 2 2 Modify the VMware ESX configuration vmx file The underlying virtual machine configuration file must be moditied to support RGS and USB devices over the RGS communication channel Most values in this file can be set using the Virtual Center GUI However a few values must be set by manually editing the vmx file of the virtual machine Administrators may also use scripting to fully automate this The Virtual Infrastructure Client GUI for editing the virtual machine configuration is shown in Figure A 1 In this figure the virtual machine named xp rgs5 has been selected by a mouse right click Edit Settings has been Process selected from the drop down menu to display this machine s properties To edit the configuration parameters click the Options tab and select the Advanced line item Figure A 1 Virtual Infrastructure Client GUI H localhost irtual Infrastructure Client File Edit View Inventory fa MSA Inventory Administration Help Scheduled Ta Ey Intel DE 2Ghz 16 fa Production Gy AMD Gt E UB UB i iscsiesx virtsa dhcp iscsi net dhcp virtsw ru isoFarm Gy AMD G2 g E i i
265. so Brokerechmedell resaz0 esso ooo S Table B 4 Security devices HP Blade Workstation Clients based on Windows XP and USB Devices Clients Windows XPe Axalto smartcard reader RGS 4 0 2 RGS 5 0 Digital Persona Keyboard RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 Digital Persona Fingerprint reader RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 a smon Cardkeybad OO o Access Biomeris J Resaoo OOO esso O S CAcivdentiy smart card reader v2 esso esso O 0 CAcividentiy smart cord readerv3 sa Keyronic USB Smarcard keybord essa SCMSCRIIT USB reoder OO OOS o s Table B 5 Touchscreen devices HP Blade Clients based on Windows USB Device Workstation Clients XP and Windows XPe The application for this device needs ELO Entuitive TouchSystems 1229L RGS 4 0 2 RGS 5 0 to have real USB hardware on the Sender computer or it will not run Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS 191 Table B 6 USB keys The following client attached USB devices can be accessed by a Remote Computer running Windows XP Professional x64 Edition if the RGS Sender version is 5 1 1 or later Clients based on Windows XP USB Devices HP Blade Workstation Clients and Windows XPe RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 as PNY 1G RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 BT Geek Squad 0 5 G RGS 5 0 RGS 5 0 re CuzerMinisG o sso J esso y Lexar lumpDrive 256M resso f esso S we ooo o eso o so CA a T E E T O E E E E T T Table B 7 CD R W Clients based on Windows XP USB Device HP Blade Workstation Clients and Windows XPe Memorex DV
266. ssreesserersrerrs 184 Tables 10 1 Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software This guide provides information that you will need to install contigure and use HP Remote Graphics Software RGS RGS enables you to view and interact with the desktop of a remote computer over a standard TCP IP computer network HP Remote Graphics Software RGS is a high performance remote desktop connection protocol that delivers an exceptional remote desktop user experience for rich user environments that include video web flash animations and graphics intensive applications All applications run natively on the remote system and take full advantage of the compute and hardware graphics resources of the sending system HP RGS captures the desktop of the remote system and transmits it over a standard network to a window on a local client using advanced image compression technology specifically designed for text digital imagery and high frame rate video applications A local hardware keyboard and mouse is supported as well as USB device redirection to provide an interactive high performance multi display desktop experience HP RGS supports a broad range of client virtualization technologies including multi user virtual desktop infrastructure VDI solutions blade PCs blade workstations desktop PCs mobile PCs and workstations i IMPORTANT Beginning at RGS 5 2 0 HP implemented licensing for the RGS Sender The RGS Receiver remains a free download and c
267. st Ef NOTE RGS event logging is supported only on the RGS Sender on Windows It is not supported on the RGS Receiver IMPORTANT The HPRemote log allows you to implement a capability called Remote Application Termination Remote Application Termination enables applications on the Sender Remote Computer to be automatically terminated if the RGS connection to the Receiver is lost See Chapter 10 for details Sender event logging on Windows 163 To view the properties of a particular event double click the event of interest this brings up the Event Properties window Figure 9 2 shows the Event Properties window for the highlighted event in Figure 9 1 As you can see the event that has been logged is the Sender connection state Figure 9 2 Event Properties window Event Properties Event User Date Time Type 4 6 2009 Source rgsender 11 26 58 PM Category None Information EventID 3 H A Computer RGS SENDER Description Primar connections 1 Mon primarry connections Data Bytes Words a000 ooo00001 OOo00000 Cancel The highlighted radio buttons allow viewing of the connection data in this case the number of primary and non primary connections in byte and word formats Chapter 10 provides more details on the supported data formats To copy the details of an event to the Clipboard click the highlighted button in Figure 9 2 By doing a paste into for example Notepad you can vie
268. t Error 30000 rror 3U lt a Waming 2 lt Dialog 15 Rgreceiver Network Timeout Warning 2000 Note Must be disconnected to adju timeouts l Rgreceiver Network Timeout Dialog 15000 If a temporary network disruption occurs for less time than the Receiver warning timeout property the Receiver will not display a warning and the user will experience only a brief drop in Remote Display Window interactivity This means for example that a user moving or scrolling a window might see a momentary decrease in interactivity If the user is not interacting with the Remote Display Window during a temporary network disruption the network disruption may not even be noticeable unless dynamic content such as video fails to update at an appropriate rate E NOTE In many cases the TCP IP network stack is able to detect and resolve network errors such as a transmitted packet not being acknowledged However if a more serious problem occurs such as a network cable being unplugged from the Local Computer the TCP IP stack will notify the RGS Receiver of a network exception In this case the RGS connection will be closed immediately independent of whether a network timeout property has been exceeded Advanced capobilities 119 Figure 6 22 shows the sequence of events commencing when sync pulses cease being detected by the Receiver Figure 6 22 Receiver timeout sequence e TCP IP stack may detect amp resolve problems e Network disr
269. t and configured for RPM package creation See script rgs_audio_support for details The Receiver will be installed into opt hpremote rgreceiver To start the Receiver execute the following command opt hpremote rgreceiver rgreceiver sh To start the Receiver in directory mode execute the following command opt hpremote rgreceiver rgreceiver sh directory Optionally add the directory opt hpremote rgreceiver to your PATH environment variable Refer to Section 3 2 3 Installing audio on the Linux Receiver to complete the Receiver installation Ej NOTE Starting the Receiver on Linux is described further in Section 5 1 Using RGS in Normal Mode Installing RGS 68 3 2 2 Uninstalling the Receiver on Linux To uninstall the RGS Receiver on Linux find the name of the RedHat RPM package for the Remote Graphics Receiver by typing rpm q a grep i rgreceiver If the Receiver is installed on the system you will see rgreceiver_ linux 32 5 1 0 ora similar Receiver package To remove the Receiver s RPM package become root and type rpm e allmatches rgreceiver linux 32 3 2 3 Installing audio on the Linux Receiver If you install audio on the Linux Receiver the audio component uses the JACK sound server API JACK is a low latency sound server that works in conjunction with the ALSA sound drivers to mix and direct audio on your system It runs as a daemon in the background and acts as a patch bay for audio
270. t shutdown of a disconnected desktop session is required Listed below are several topics to consider when designing application control agents for your environment The topics are not exhaustive use them as a starting point for a more complete design that meets your business requirements Desktop session logout Situation In some circumstances loss of a primary user connection should trigger a full shutdown of all applications and force a logout of the desktop session perhaps after a specitied time limit for reconnection has expired This action would drop all connections to the remote session Benefit Implementing a full desktop session shutdown logout ensures that all connection activity ceases immediately and ensure that applications are prevented from further unattended actions Shutdown of a remote session frees the workstation for connection by other users This approach is the most absolute and secure solution for desktop session management Agent relies upon Windows logout routines to terminate environment simple in design and result Issue Forcing a desktop session shutdown logout can result in data loss for any open applications on the desktop session Forcing session logouts can result in application alert prompts requiring user interaction to save altered data These prompts can delay or halt an interactive logout Session termination also destroys memory of window placement on the desktop and requires user intervention at res
271. tallations that require customization or need to use other features from the rgs audio support script here are additional details for its use Installing RGS 69 The audio support bundle ships as hp rgs 4 audiosupport tar gz lt is accessed by the RGS install sh script in opt hpremote or may be utilized for manual installations RPM package building The install process requires a locally writable directory in which to build Locate the support bundle in an appropriate directory before installation Use the following command to unpack the file manually if desired tar xzf hp rgs 4 audiosupport tar gz As the user root change directory into the one created by the command above It will contain important files such as README txt basic instructions and file manifest rgs audio support shell installation script for ALSA JACK libraries alsa tar bz2 recently validated tar archives from the ALSA project provided only for open source requirements and legacy installations see http alsa project org jack tar gz recently validated tar archives from the JACK Audio Connection Kit project see hitp jackit sourceforge net libsndfile tar gz recently validated tar archives from the libsndfile project JACK dependency see http www mega nerd com libsndfile The sample installation script rgs_audio support offers three installation scenarios e install This command unpacks all tar archives into a lo
272. tart Selective environment shutdown Situation Partial shutdown of an environment only terminates specific applications of interest It does not implement a full desktop session logout It selectively protects only the most critical applications requiring oversight and control Benefit Preserves the active desktop session for connection at a later time Selectively terminates the applications of interest Preserves data not governed by an automated shutdown policy Supports session recovery with an arbitrary connection time If done in layers giving some applications more time to live than others then a gradual soft landing shutdown can occur that ultimately results in a full logout Idle resources over a specific amount of time can be returned to a remote server pool Issue Potentially more complicated to implement Can require coordination of multiple agents to handle layered shutdown May still result in data loss for specific applications May also require a master semaphore to halt terminate multiple agents if the user reconnects and wants to stop the shutdown process Wrapping applications of interest Situation Agents can be launched that supervise only specific applications in a given environment Tying agents to specific applications is a selective safety net for every user Benefit Application specitic agents can be implemented as plug ins or support utilities for a given application In the future certain software pro
273. tat n a If the IP address associated with the Sender port listening port 42966 is private APIPA is the likely cause For more information on this topic go to support microsoft com kb 220874 Log out If you do log into the Remote Computer to verify any of the above items ensure that you log out when you re done Pre connection checklist 75 4 3 NIC binding on the Sender If the Remote Computer has multiple NICs it is possible for the RGS Sender to be listening on one NIC while the RGS Receiver is trying to establish a connection to the other NIC There are three methods to deal with multiple NICs 1 Manually reconfigure which of the two NICs RGS binds to see Section 4 3 1 Manual NIC reconfiguration 2 Use the RGS Sender NIC binding properties introduced at RGS 5 1 to explicitly specify which NIC RGS binds to see Section 4 3 2 NIC reconfiguration using the NIC binding properties 3 Disable one of the NICs and restart the Sender the Sender will then bind to the enabled NIC The disadvantage of this method of course is that one of the NICs will no longer be usable Methods 1 and 2 are described in the next two sections 4 3 1 Manual NIC reconfiguration The RGS Sender binds to the first NIC detected during booting To determine the IP address of the first NIC perform the following steps on the Remote Computer 1 To view both NICs click start gt Control Panel gt Network Connections see F
274. te Computer is displayed in a separate Remote Display Window on the Local Computer Figure 2 7 A Local Computer displaying two desktop sessions Remote Computer 1 Local Computer Ey IMPORTANT Starting up two or more instances of the RGS Receiver to achieve a many to one connection is not supported Achieving a many to one connection is only supported through the use of Directory Mode The many to one connection capability allows implementation of a virtual KVM keyboard video and mouse switch The virtual KVM switch emulates the functionality of a standard KVM switch in software to provide a convenient method to connect a single monitor keyboard and mouse all on the Local Computer to multiple Remote Computers Using the RGS Setup Mode see Section 5 1 2 Setup Mode you can switch the local monitor to display each of the Remote Computer frame buffers The Receiver can also switch audio between active sessions as described in the Controlling Receiver Settings section using the audio follows focus option 2 8 4 One to many connection RGS also supports a one to many connection allowing the frame buffer of a Remote Computer to be displayed on multiple Local Computers see Figure 2 8 In this figure there is one primary user who is logged into the Remote Computer and two local users who are viewing the primary user s desktop session on the Remote Computer Figure 2 8 Multiple users can access the desktop of a Remote Comput
275. te Display Window can be positioned to occupy a single monitor Remote Computer 1 Local Computer As always each Remote Computer Sender frame buffer is displayed in its own Remote Display Window In Figure 2 14 the user has positioned each Remote Display Window to occupy a single monitor achieving the result that the left monitor is dedicated to Remote Computer 1 while the right monitor is dedicated to Remote Computer 2 2 13 Remote Computer monitor blanking overview New in RGS 5 0 this feature blanks the Remote Computer monitor if one is connected when the local user establishes an RGS connection to the Remote Computer and logs in in other words becomes the primary user This feature is provided for security to ensure that the primary user s desktop session on the Remote Computer is not visible on a monitor connected to the Remote Computer For details on monitor blanking see Section 5 1 4 Remote Computer monitor blanking operation 2 14 Video overlay surfaces When the Windows Sender is installed on a computer video overlay surfaces also known as overlay planes are disabled on the computer Some media players that use video overlay surfaces will not display correctly This can often be resolved by disabling the use of video overlay surfaces in the media player Most OpenGL applications will detect the disabling of overlay surfaces and will work correctly However if your OpenGL application attempts to use the di
276. terface O as root type S usr local sbin ethtool etho To set the LAN characteristics for a 100 Mb sec connection running full duplex mode as root type S usr local sbin ethtool s ethO speed 100 duplex full autoneg off If you are not satisfied with your network performance look at the log files on your network switch if the Local Computer is connected to one A significant number of errors on the switch port may indicate that the computer Optimizing RGS performance 177 or network is not configured correctly Work with your IT organization to optimize your computer and network configuration Optimizing RGS performance 178 12 Troubleshooting RGS This chapter provides suggestions on troubleshooting potential issues with RGS Refer also to Chapter 13 RGS error messages which lists the RGS error messages and their potential causes 12 1 Potential RGS issues and troubleshooting suggestions Table 12 1 lists several potential RGS issues and provides a number of troubleshooting suggestions Table 12 1 Potential RGS issues and troubleshooting suggestions Issue Can t connect to the RGS Sender A connection is established but it appears to time out Graphics pertormance appears slow Remote audio doesn t work Remote USB doesn t work Suggestion Verity that the pre connection checklist is satisfied as described in Chapter 4 Pre connection checklist See the section Network timeout issues
277. th STDOUT and rg log logging are required uncomment out the appropriate line and comment out the previously uncommented line NOTE The logSetup file is set to read only during Sender installation so you ll need to uncheck the Read only property to edit the file NOTE In order to log Remote Clipboard activities on the Sender DEBUG level logging not the default INFO level logging must be specified in the logSetup file Advanced capabilities 134 6 8 Statistics The options available under the Statistics tab in the Receiver Control Panel are shown in Figure 6 34 Figure 6 34 Options available under the Statistics tab Pe ee eee OE 6 a General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Logging statistics Total network usage Mbits sec 4 93 Image updates per second 34 Copy rectangles per second 0 The Statistics tab displays aggregate data for all connected sessions e Total network usage Mbits sec The combined network traffic received from all Remote Computers e Image updates per second The combined number of image updates per second received from all connections Copy rectangles per second The combined number of copy updates per second received from alll connections Advanced capabilities 135 7 Using Directory Mode Directory Mode enables the local user to automatically open connections to multiple Remote Computers based on the computers assigned to each user When the user starts t
278. th a dialog titled Installation Number When you see this dialog enter the installation number provided with your acquisition of RHEL 5 2 If the installation number is entered correctly you ll see the Software Development checkbox in the screen following the root password prompt Check this checkbox to ensure that the components required for RGS operation are installed 3 2 1 Installing the Receiver on Linux f NOTE Beginning with RGS 5 1 3 the Linux RGS Receiver is available in both 32 bit and 64 bit versions To install the RGS Receiver on Linux perform the following steps 1 ye 3 Login as root Go to the directory where you downloaded RGS and change to the directory 1in32 receiver 32 bit version or 1in64 receiver 64 bit version Execute the following command sf installs NOTE If remote audio is installed RGS requires certain audio support utilities be available for remote audio support from appropriate Senders This software based upon ALSA sound libraries and JACK Audio Connection Kit libraries must be built and installed on the target system as a part of the install sh script The install script assumes a supported set of ALSA sound libraries from HP or Red Hat Enterprise Linux release 4 or greater already exist on the platform Only the JACK Audio Connection Kit is built during install and it requires ALSA sound library support NOTE The files contained within hp_rgs_4_audiosupport tar gz can also be buil
279. the Remote Computer desktop session using RGS only if allowed by the primary user There are situations however where a local user may replace the previous primary user and become the new primary user The process by which a local user can become a primary user or view the primary user s desktop is described in detail in this guide Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software 13 1 3 RGS features HP RGS supports a number of features designed to optimize performance security and functionality see Figure 1 3 Figure 1 3 Features of HP RGS HP developed compression algorithms are used to minimize data transmission requirements Collaboration Multiple Local Computers can connect toa single Remote Computer allowing all users to simultaneously view and sequentially interact Only those sections of the screen which with the applications running change are captured compressed and on the Remote Computer Performance is enhanced through the transmitted to the Local Computer use of graphics acceleration hardware Security is provided through Local encryption of the pixel data Computer 1 Application sent over the network transparency TCP IP network Remote Computer Local Computer 2 HP ProLiant xw460c Blade Workstation Application transparency HP RGS supports application transparency which enables applications to be run on the Remote Computer and accessed from the Local Computer with
280. the following DWORD Value and set its value to 1 HKLM System CurrentControlSet Services hprpusbh Parameters NoAutoDevice This will disable auto remoting without having to remove the individual auto remote DWORD entries To re enable auto remoting either set NoAutoDevice to O or remove the NoAutoDevice DWORD 6 3 4 Supported remote USB devices HP has tested a number of USB devices to verify they work correctly when attached to a Remote Computer from a Local Computer See Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS for a list of supported USB devices Advanced capabilities 110 6 3 5 Remote USB Access Control List RGS supports a per Remote Computer access control list ACL file that specifies which USB devices are allowed to be remotely attached to the Remote Computer from a Local Computer and which USB devices are denied attachment The ACL file which resides on the Remote Computer supports allowing denying USB device attachments based on the following nine USB descriptor fields Device Class Device Subclass Device Protocol Vendor ID Product ID Device BCD Manufacturer Product Type ee ee eS Serial Number USB device mounting can also be allowed denied based on the following two parameters e P address of the Local Computer e The domain group of the local user The ACL file supports two rule types allow and deny The rules are evaluated by the Remote Computer for each USB connection request from a
281. the password changed Starting at RGS 5 1 you can change an expired password from the RGS Receiver If you enter an expired password you will see a dialog stating that the password must be changed see Figure 5 13 Figure 5 13 Dialog indicating that the password must be changed HP Remote Graphics Receiver x You must change your password before logging on After clicking OK you ll see the Change Password dialog see Figure 5 14 Figure 5 14 Change Password dialog Change Password talladepgavm1 3 New Password Confim New Password Enter the requested information to change your password Using RGS 92 5 5 Collaborating RGS enables the primary user to share his or her desktop session with several local users simultaneously see Section 2 8 4 One to many connection This feature can be used in a variety of collaborative scenarios including classroom instruction design reviews and technical support 5 5 1 Creating a collaboration session A collaboration session is created when one or more local users are authorized by the primary user to connect to the primary user s desktop session This allows all users primary and local to view and interact with the primary user s desktop see Figure 5 15 Figure 5 15 Multiple local users can view and interact with the primary user s desktop Local Computers Primary User logged into Remote Computer Remote Computer Local User 1 viewing primary
282. thenticating against a computer in a domain Enter hostname usemame d i authenticating against a computer in a workgroup 1985 2001 s HAR Copan ES This computer is in use and has been locked User name i 0 10 62 65 Administrator SS Press Ctrl Alt Delete to begin Only RGS SENDERIocal_user_1 cal_user_1 or an administrator can 5 this computer Requiring this key combination at startup helps keep your computer secure For more information click Help Password eeeeeees Press Ctrl Alt Del to unlock this computer RGS overview 25 If another user is already logged into the Remote Computer the second authentication step is replaced by an authorization step in which the currently logged in user receives an authorization prompt to allow or disallow the new user to join connect to the existing desktop session see Figure 2 11 The new user is allowed to connect to the existing RGS connection only if the currently logged in user authorizes the connection Figure 2 11 RGS connection process if another user is already logged into the Remote Computer Step 2 Authorization by the currently logged in user Step 1 Authenticating the RGS connection RGS Connection Authenticate to 10 10 42 65 HP Remote Graphics Sender Enter domain usemname and password if authenticating against a computer in a domain Enter hostname Wusemame Do you want FCIM6867LB rqdemo to connect to your desktop authenticating against a
283. this box is unchecked monaural audio is sent by the Remote Computer Advanced capabilities 104 Quality This pull down menu allows the local user to select one of three different audio quality settings e Low Specifies a sampling rate of 11 kHz e Medium Specifies a sampling rate of 22 kHz e High Specities a sampling rate of 44 kHz which is equivalent to CD quality audio Higher quality audio and its higher sampling rate requires more network bandwidth and can impact the performance of RGS especially over bandwidth constrained networks 6 2 5 Potential audio issues Several potential audio issues are described below along with their potential causes No audio on Windows Receiver Verify that your Local Computer audio device is working The volume control slider on the Receiver should play the default beep when released Ensure that the Speaker Button on the Receiver Control Panel is not in the mute position Refer to the Windows Sender Audio Installation section for information on selecting the mixer as the input line Refer to Section 6 2 2 Calibrating audio on the Sender for information on how to ensure the volume levels are not too low Make sure that mute is not enabled on the Wave line of the Sender or Receiver Volume Control Audio not continuous Low bandwidth connections can cause discontinuities in the audio stream Reducing the quality and turning off stereo may improve the audio quality Some high priority CP
284. ties the Y position of the session N Remote Display Window as measured from the top of the Local Computer display Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay IsPreferredResolutionEnabled bool 0 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay IsPreferredResolutionEnabled IsMutable bool 1 This property if set true 1 enables the following preferred resolution property values to be communicated to the Remote Computer The default value is O do not enable the preferred resolution property to be communicated to the Remote Computer Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionHeight int 0 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionHeight IsMutable bool 1 See the description of the following property Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionWidth int 0 Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay PreferredResolutionWidth IsMutable bool 1 This property and the above property specify the preferred resolution of the Remote Display Window in pixels This resolution is communicated to the Remote Computer Sender which will attempt to adapt its resolution to match the resolution preference of the Local Computer If the Remote Computer is unable to match the resolution preference of the Local Computer a warning dialog is displayed on the Local Computer E NOTE The per session property Rgreceiver Session lt N gt VirtualDisplay IsPreferredResolutionEnabled takes precedence o
285. tions aa Deskop FCS 4 Notebook PCs FIRS GT HP GT7720 HP GT7720w HP dc 3 Blade WS Client HP Blade WS Client HP dc 2 Blade WS Client HP 4410t HP 6720t HP 2533t HP t5730w HP t5630w HP t5730 HP t5630 HP t5720 mesa iv ana Remote USB Support WA ale XP Professional SP1 SP2 SP3 32 BIT he ade Vista Business Ultimate and Enterprise 32 bit 64 atrix it FF Blade Werksaons FP Blade FC STH Taraa ony 2 16 6 Supported USB devices HP has tested a number of USB devices to verify they work correctly when attached to a Remote Computer from a Local Computer See Appendix B USB devices supported by RGS for a list of supported USB devices 2 17 Remote audio overview This section describes RGS support of remote audio on Windows and Linux Rather than describe all four combinations of Remote and Local Computers running Windows and Linux the following sections describe remote audio when both computers are running Windows followed by a remote audio description when both computers are running Linux RGS overview 35 2 17 1 Remote audio on Windows RGS on Windows supports remote audio allowing audio generated by the application on the Remote Computer to be captured and transmitted to the Local Computer for playback In addition microphone input on the Local Computer running Microsoft Windows XP can be sent to the application running on the Remote Computer also using Microsoft Windows XP Remote microphone is not supported on Mic
286. to display the RGS Sender installation folder and locate the rgdiag exe program with the RGS icon On a 32 bit Windows system this tool is normally located at C Program Files Hewlett Packard Remote Graphics Sender rgdiag exe Note that the rgdiag exe tool does not run as part of an unattended install Starting the Sender on Windows The Windows Sender is comprised of two processes one of which runs as a Windows Service When the Remote Computer boots the installed services are typically started The service process rgsendersvc exe will then start the RGS Sender process rgsender exe When the RGS Sender is installed an entry is added in the Windows Registry for the Remote Graphics Sender service The Windows Sender service can also be registered and unregistered with Windows via command line like rgsendersvc exe service registers the RGS Sender service with Windows rgsendersvc exe unregserver unregisters the RGS Sender service with Windows rgsender exe supports the following options passed to it via registry parameters to rgsendersvc exe see the registry editing instructions below nocollab timeout value authtimeout value 1 logSetupFile v ver version h help belownormal normal abovenormal high Rgsender propertyname value The functionality of each option is as follows nocollab Disables collaboration When specified only the primary user can connect to the Send
287. to remote attachment of the USB drive key Remote Computer Local Computer 2A RG5 5ENDER Computer See Disk drives Se MAXTOR ATLASISK FSWL5S SCSI Disk Device id Display adapters HUA DVD CD ROM drives HP18009285527 Computer age Disk drives i BAYAA Z Display adapters gb DVD CD ROM drives To connect the USB drive key to a Remote Computer in Directory Mode perform the following steps 1 Click the USB tab on the Receiver Control Panel Click the Enable Remote USB checkbox to enable the remote USB connection Select the IP address or hostname of the Remote Computer and click Connect Once connection has been established remove and re insert the USB drive key this step is required to initiate the remote USB attachment Prp As shown in Figure 6 15 the USB drive key is now attached to the Remote Computer and is no longer available to the Local Computer Figure 6 15 After remote attachment of the USB drive key Remote Computer Local Computer RGS SENDER HP 18009265527 W Computer Computer ee Disk drives Sa Disk drives Sat MAXTOR ATLASISK 73WLS SCSI Disk Device Se SAMSUNG HDOOGOHI Se LSB DISK 28 USS Device ig Display adapters i Display adapters DVD CD ROM drives 4 DVD CD ROM drives Advanced capabilities 108 6 3 2 USB session switching New with RGS 5 1 3 is the ability to dynamically move USB devices from one Remote Computer to another This enables USB de
288. trol Panel to the top of the window stack In Normal Mode the Local Computer can connect to only one Remote Computer at a time as described in Section 2 8 2 One to one connection If an attempt is made to connect to a second Remote Computer using the Receiver Control Panel the connection to the first Remote Computer is terminated 5 1 1 Receiver Control Panel Now that a connection has been established the Receiver Control Panel is described in more detail The Receiver Control Panel is used to perform the following tasks e Establish a connection To establish a connection to a Remote Computer enter the hostname or IP address of the computer in the Hostname field Press Enter or click the Connect button to connect to the Remote Computer The selector on the right side of the text box displays a history of previously connected computers that can be selected e Close a connection To close a connection press the Disconnect button e Enter Setup Mode To enter Setup Mode press the Setup Mode button In Setup Mode the Receiver suspends mouse and keyboard input to the Remote Computer allowing the user to use the mouse and keyboard to interact with local Remote Display Windows See Section 5 1 2 Setup Mode for more information e View advanced operations Click Advanced gt gt gt to view the tabs which provide access to many of the advanced capabilities of RGS e Display help Click Help to display the online help On L
289. ttings Guest Account security policies RDP interoperability and Easy Login settings that might prevent a remote connection If the tool detects a problem the dialog of Figure 3 6 is displayed allowing you to run the tool manually Figure 3 7 shows the output generated by the tool Figure 3 7 Output of the RGS Diagnostics Tool Remote Graphics Diagnostics Test Name Results Windows sP Firewall passed Select a test from the list on che left bo see test details Force Guest passed When Finished close this dialog or press the Quit button Multiple Sessions FAILED Single Sign on disabled Easy Login disabled Service dependencies passed GPU display model mot supported Changelist display model supported Comparitron display model supported The Test Name left panel shows the list of tests that have been run Selecting a test with the mouse will display additional information in the Results right panel The Rerun Tests button on the bottom left reruns all tests The example window shows that all tests have passed with the exception of the Multiple Sessions test To determine Installing RGS 54 what this test looked for why it failed whether this failure would prevent connections and how to fix the problem click on the Multiple Sessions test title to display its details in the Results panel The RGS Diagnostics Tool can be run any time after RGS Sender installation To run the Diagnostics Tool use Windows Explorer
290. ttings The default value is 1 the Remote Clipboard setting can be changed by the user Rgreceiver Clipboard IsEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver Clipboard IsEnabled IsMutable bool 1 This is a per receiver property If set to 1 the local user can use Remote Clipboard If set to O the local user cannot use Remote Clipboard The default value is 1 Remote Clipboard is enabled Rgreceiver Session lt N gt Clipboard IsEnabled bool 1 This is a per session property If set to 1 Remote Clipboard is enabled for the session N Remote Display Window In order for Remote Clipboard operation to be enabled for session N the per receiver property Rgreceiver Clipboard IsEnabled must also be 1 The default value for both properties per receiver and per session is 1 Remote Clipboard is enabled RGS properties 153 Rgreceiver Clipboard FilterString string see below for default value IMPORTANT This property is for advanced users only The property string should be changed from its default value only if Remote Clipboard doesn t support the clipboard format required by your application For more information on clipboard formats see the Microsoft Developer Network article Clipboard Formats at hitp msdn2 microsoft com en us library ms649013 aspx This property contains a list of clipboard formats allowed to be transferred using Remote Clipboard Therefore this property is a keep filter not a reject filter The string is a regular expression a
291. ty values in the Receiver configuration file rcgreceiverconfig that is installed with the RGS Receiver However as noted previously the properties in both the Receiver and Sender configuration files are initially commented out RGS properties 141 8 5 2 Receiver property groups RGS supports the following groups of Receiver properties Click on each group name to view the descriptions of the properties in the group Per receiver properties General properties group e Rgreceiver IsBordersEnabled e Rgreceiver IsSnapEnabled e Rgreceiver IsAlwaysPromptCredentialsEnabled e Rgreceiver Directory e Rgreceiver MaxSenderListSize e Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled e Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverPhysicalDisplaysEnabled e Rgreceiver RecentWindowPositions deprecated e Rgreceiver ConnectionWarningColor e Rgreceiver IsGlobalImageUpdateMutable deprecated e Rgreceiver IsGlobalImageUpdateEnabled e Rgreceiver MaxImageUpdateRequests e Rgreceiver IsMouseSyncEnabled Browser properties group e Rgreceiver Browser IsMutable e Rgreceiver Browser Name Audio properties group e Rgreceiver Audio IsMutable e Rgreceiver Audio IsEnabled e Rgreceiver Audio Quality e Rgreceiver Audio IsFollowsFocusEnabled e Rgreceiver Audio IsInStereo Microphone property group e Rgreceiver Mic IsEnabled USB properties group e Rgreceiver Usb IsMutable e Rgreceiver Usb ActiveSession e Rgreceiver Usb IsEnabled Network properties
292. ty before the Receiver is started The default value is 1 the image quality can be adjusted by user Rgreceiver ImageCodec Quality int 65 Rgreceiver ImageCodec Quality IsMutable bool 1 This property sets the image quality in the Remote Display Window and can be set to a value from O to 100 A value of 100 is the highest image while O is the lowest image quality Under most circumstances the default value of 65 will be sufficient Lower values of Rgreceiver ImageCodec Quality will typically reduce RGS bandwidth requirements on the network E NOTE Even with an image quality of 100 RGS still performs image compression to reduce the network bandwidth requirements While the image on the Receiver will usually appear visually lossless to the user at an image quality of 100 the actual image data sent over the network from the Sender to the Receiver will be lossy to a limited extent Rgreceiver ImageCodec IsBoostEnabled bool 1 Rgreceiver ImageCodec IsBoostEnabled IsMutable bool 1 This property was added beginning with RGS 5 2 6 and requires that both the RGS Sender and Receiver be version 5 2 6 or later Setting the property to 1 will improve boost image quality for certain types of images primarily images containing significant amounts of text or lines Because of the high contrast ratio between adjacent pixels such images often don t compress well When this property is set to 1 such high contrast cases will be compressed in
293. udio from the Local to the Local Computer Computer to the Remote Computer RGS overview 38 Table 2 2 Linux RGS audio data paths Audio Playback from the Remote Computer Sending of microphone audio from the Local to the Local Computer Computer to the Remote Computer 1 The application generated audio output USB devices are Local Linux does not support 2 If an audio device is installed the application generated locally mounted USB microphones audio is routed through it Note that blade workstations do USB devices are Remote Beginning at RGS not contain audio devices theretore audio playback is not 5 2 0 certain USB microphones can be supported on blade workstations mounted to the Remote Computer using the 3 The HP Remote Audio virtual device is not supported on Linux remote USB driver see Appendix B for the Audio from either the audio device is sent to the RGS Audio supported microphones See the previous Recorder section for a description of Remote USB 5 The RGS Audio Recorder captures the audio which is sent by open RGS to the Local Computer 6 The RGS Audio Player on the Local Computer decodes the received audio and sends it to the audio mixer 7 The output of the audio mixer is sent to the Local Computer audio device 8 The audio device drives an audio output device such as a speaker RGS overview 39 2 17 3 Support of sound recording devices on Microsoft Windows XP Professional E NOTE The
294. umber must then be specified in the above Hostname dialog box in either of the following formats hostname port number IP address port number For example if the Rgsender Network Port property is used to change the Sender port to 42970 the Sender IP address in Figure 5 2 would need to be modified to include the port number as follows 15 2 76 29 42970 Provide a username and password as prompted If the connection succeeds the Remote Display Window will be displayed on the Local Computer showing the desktop session of the Remote Computer see Figure 5 3 Figure 5 3 Remote Display Window 15 2 76 101 Remote Display Window Using RGS 81 ee IMPORTANT If the connection attempt fails refer to Chapter 4 Pre connection checklist for a list of conditions which must be met in order for a connection to be established IMPORTANT If your RGS Sender is not yet licensed the error dialog in Figure 2 3 will be displayed in the Remote Display Window For information on Sender licensing see the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide available at www hp com support rgs_manuals IMPORTANT On Linux The Receiver Control Panel will not stay on top of other windows in the desktop and can therefore get lost Also for session managers that support multiple desktops the Receiver control panel will not by default show up in all desktops Refer to Section 5 1 2 Setup Mode to understand how to raise the Receiver Con
295. umber of primary users has dropped to zero If so further code can be added to terminate applications on the Sender A number of design issues for the Windows agent are described in the next section The sample code is a fixed polling Windows agent that reads and interprets the HPRemote event log The agent uses two functions 1 processEvent eventServer eventSource dwEventNum e open event log read event dwEventNum close event logTo e if a valid read process recognized Event IDs then return 2 monitorEvents eventServer eventSource seconds e fora finite number of seconds or infinite if seconds lt 0 do e open event log read log length close event log e if log has changed processEvent else sleep for X ms To properly use the function monitorEvents the following strings must be defined in the function call LPCTSTR eventServer if string is defined as yourservername then the log is stored on a remote server if the string is empty NULL then the log is stored locally note that four backlashes compiles to two in a string constant e LPCTSTR eventSource the name of the target event generator e g rgreceiver The sample agent use Microsoft event logging functions such as OpenEventLog ReadEventLog and CloseEventLog For information on these functions refer to the Event Logging Functions link highlighted in Figure 9 4 The sample agent is listed below Where noted user specific code should be added
296. uption may not be noticeable e Serious network problems may cause the RGS connection to close 2 30 0 seconds seconds time sync pulses network warning network error stop being timeout property timeout property detected by exceeded exceeded the Receiver HP Remote Graphics Receiver f i Connection Lost Possible reasons include the Following 1 The Sender may have explicitly closed your connection For example if the remote desktop is logged out the connection may be closed 2 IF you connected to a desktop that was not logged in and another user logged in your connection will be disconnected 3 IF you were connected to a bogged in desktop and the logged in user disconnects your connection wil be disconnected too 4 The network may have been disconnected closed or temporarily disrupted 5 The Sender service daemon may have been stopped re started or killed 6 The Sender system may have been stopped shutdown or re started 7 IF connecting to a UNIX system the Server may have been stopped or amp The Sender or X Server may have experienced a Failure Atter the Receiver warning timeout property has been exceeded two seconds in this case the Receiver Remote Display Window will dim and display a warning message to the user The dimmed window and warning message notify the user of the potentially stale contents in the Remote Display Window During this time the Remote Display Window will appear unresponsive to the
297. ure 3 15 shows the registry key contents Figure 3 15 Addition of the GinaDllMode key to the registry 4 Remote Graphics Sender lab cinaDillMade REG SZ Hersso 7 Restart the computer The hprgina d11 module will be loaded by WinLogon when started Summary If the GinaDLL key does not currently exist in the registry Microsoft s default GINA DLL msgina d11 is loaded by WinLogon Adding the GinaDLL registry key and setting its value to hprgina dll informs WinLogon to load hprgina d11 instead of the default msgina d1l Setting the local security policy The local security policy Interactive logon Do not require CTRL ALT DEL must be disabled to support Single Sign on This can be set in the Windows Local Security Settings under Security Options The RGS Diagnostics Tool programmatically detects if this local security policy is set correctly See the section Using the RGS Diagnostics Tool on Windows for information on this tool E NOTE Creating the GinaDLL registry key disables Window s Fast User Switching and Welcome Screen features Disabling Single Sign on There are two methods to disable Single Sign on 1 Using the rgadmin tool to disable Single Sign on The rgadmin tool shown in Figure 3 13 can be used to disable Single Sign on Using the rgadmin tool to disable Single Sign on is preferred over the manual method described next 2 Manually disabling Single Sign on To disable Single Sign on without using the
298. ure your DHCP and DNS servers so that the hostname resolves to the IP address of the correct first NIC e Use the Nslookup command to determine the IP address that the hostname resolves to Then using the arrow buttons to the right of the Connections box on the Advanced Settings screen see Figure 4 4 change the first NIC to correspond with the IP address returned by Nslookup After performing this step you must either reboot the computer or restart the RGS Sender see Figure 4 5 Pre connection checklist 77 Figure 4 5 Restarting the RGS Sender Mame Descripti Ss Remote Access Connection Manager Creates ity Remote Desktop Help Session Manager Manages iy Remote Graphics Sender Service Sa Remote Procedure Call RPC Ss Remote Procedure Call RPT Loc ity Remote Registry S Removable Storage S Routing and Remote Access Mi msin Hav Derinin Makha i E G Ka Mm a Restart 4 3 2 NIC reconfiguration using the NIC binding properties At RGS 5 1 several new Sender properties were added to allow the administrator to configure which NIC s the RGS Sender will listen to for connection requests For a description of these properties refer to Section 8 6 6 Sender NIC binding properties Figure 4 6 shows how the two NICs can be referenced in numerical sequence in their binding order The NIC binding properties permit specification of which NIC either O or 1 the RGS Sender will listen to for connection
299. ustom user authentication methods If it is determined that functionality of both the RGS Easy Login and a custom GINA module is required the hprgina d11 needs further configuration The hprgina d11 module needs to be set up to load the custom GINA module rather than the default msgina d11 as described above There are three ways to enable the hprgina d11 module to load a custom GINA module 1 Install time specification of the custom GINA module A custom GINA module can be chained by the hprgina d11 at install time This is the preferred method The installer will bring up a GUI that allows the Easy Login GINA module hprgina d11 to be enabled as well as provides a text box to enter the name of the custom GINA module The name of the custom module is all that is needed provided it is installed in the C WINDOWS system32 directory If the custom module is installed elsewhere the full file path needs to be entered 2 Using the rgadmin tool to specity a custom GINA module The rgadmin tool can be used to chain a custom GINA module When Enable Easy Login is selected the associated text entry box Chained GINA DIl is un greyed out Enter the name of the custom GINA module in the text box and click Apply Using the rgadmin tool to specify a custom GINA module is preferred over the manual method described next 3 Manually enabling hprgina dll to load a custom GINA module To manually enable the hprgina d11 module to load a custom GINA module c
300. uter s response if this service Falls First failure Take No Action t Take No Acton second failure Restart the Service l Run a Program subsequent failures Restart the Computer Reset fail count after days Restart service after minutes Run program Frogram Append fail count to end of command line fal 1 Restart Computer Options Microsoft Remote Desktop Recovery If the RGS Sender becomes unavailable and the Receiver can no longer connect to the Sender a Windows system with Remote Desktop services enabled can access the Remote Computer to diagnose the issue Remote Application Termination 175 11 Optimizing RGS pertormance This chapter provides suggestions on optimizing RGS performance including optimizing the Remote Computer display settings and the network configuration 11 1 Performance tuning for all platforms The following suggestions apply to all platforms e Set the network to full duplex mode To obtain the best performance the network between the RGS Sender and RGS Receiver should operate in full duplex mode e Disable transition effects Don t use color or animated cursors on the Remote Computer Although RGS displays color and animated cursors very well this typically requires more network bandwidth and CPU resources e Set the Remote Computer desktop background to a solid color to minimize the amount of image data that needs to be sent On Windows perform the following
301. ver the per Receiver property Rgreceiver IsMatchReceiverResolutionEnabled This allows individual sessions to override the global property RGS properties 156 8 6 RGS Sender properties RGS supports the following hierarchy of methods to set the Sender properties see Figure 8 8 Figure 8 8 Sender properties hierarchy Highest Sender command line properties rgsenderconfig file properties Sender default properties Lowest Properties set by methods higher on the list override properties set by methods lower on the list For example a Sender command line property can override a property specified in the rgsenderconfig file Similarly an rgsenderconfig file property can override a Sender default property The Sender unlike the Receiver does not support archive file properties because the Sender does not provide a user interface that allows its properties to be modified Sender command line properties See Section 8 3 Setting properties on the command line rgsendercontig tile properties See Section 8 2 Setting property values in a configuration file Sender default properties The Sender has a set of default properties that are built into the Sender These are identical to the property values in the Sender configuration file rgsenderconf ig that is installed with the RGS Sender However as noted previously the properties in both the Receiver and Sender configuration files are initially commented out 8 6 1 Sen
302. vice can be stopped started or resumed Additionally the properties of the service can be controlled such as the start up type and the recovery mode Installing RGS 56 Figure 3 9 The Remote Graphics Sender service Services lS ER AE Sa Services Local 7h Services Local Remote Graphics Sender Service Mame Descripti Sa Remote Access Connection Manager Creates fy Remote Desktop Help Session Manager Manages Sa Remote Graphics Sender Service The Rem Sa Remote Procedure Call RPC Provides Description Remote Procedure Call RPC Locator The Remote Graphics Sender transmits T i a graphics updates audio and USB data ae Remote Registry to an RGS Receiver Itreceives and Sa Removable Storage processes keyboard events mouse Sa Routing and Remote Access Offers re events and USB data from the Receiver g na Fie Action View Help l Stop the service Restart the service iE D esie O se Caton LitabkeBeAe 17 lt im gt Extended 4 Standard Setting the Windows Sender process priority This section discusses adjusting the process priority of the Windows Sender The default process priority of the Windows Sender is normal In some cases increasing the process priority of the Sender will improve interactivity for example when the Windows scheduling algorithms does not give the RGS Sender sufficient CPU time to maintain smooth interactivity Networking performance can also contribute to reduced intera
303. vices to be detached from one Remote Computer and made accessible by another Remote Computer without first needing to disconnect the RGS connections To move USB devices to a different Remote Computer in Directory Mode simply specify the new Remote Computer Sender in the Select sender dropdown menu see Figure 6 16 The USB devices will be detached from the current computer and attached to the selected computer Figure 6 16 Dynamically moving USB devices to another Remote Computer HP Remote Graphics Receiver Directory File Hal C Program Files HewlettPackard Remote Graphics Re About Disconnect All Connect All setup Mode q ees anea General Audio USB Network Hotkeys Clipboard Loggir Enable Remote USB Select sender 10 10 42 65 7010 42 65 15 2 76 29 6 3 3 Auto remoting of USB devices In addition to the general default settings for remote USB configurations RGS 5 2 6 and higher releases support auto remote and auto return of user specified USB devices when using Windows on both the sender and receiver platforms Auto remote allows specified USB devices to be automatically attached to a remote sender session at RGS connection and then returned to the local client at RGS disconnect A CAUTION Enabling auto remoting of specific USB devices requires modifications to the Windows Registry Registry modifications should only be made by experienced personnel Because a
304. viders may provide custom interfaces for safe shutdown messages from an agent or the operating system Custom agents can be independently maintained and tied to specific application releases for greater support flexibility Independent agent design supports unit testing and decouples environmental dependencies Issue Users need specific recourse to disarm an agent if they reconnect Applications may not interact well with a dedicated agent and only shutdown due to a global shutdown request Dedicated agents could possibly be compromised Remote Application Termination 173 Administrator alerts Situation Instead of shutting down an environment an agent can be designed to alert an administrator or operator to determine the status of the user before taking action This watchdog approach can further be defined to exploit redundant network connection support to a remote system to allow user directed shutdowns to occur Benefit System agents are not required to take destructive action they serve only as alarms and monitors for alternative human intervention Issue May require redundant networking channel Requires administrator or operator availability to support Anticipating user disconnects and reconnects Situation Users must first be warned about the consequences of disconnection Agents that provide protection for a disconnected session may become a nuisance for unsuspecting users if they fail to address protective measures in
305. w a text listing of the event details Sender event logging on Windows 164 Whenever the Local Computer Receiver either establishes a connection to the Sender or disconnects from the Sender the IP address and port number of the Local Computer are logged in the HPRemote log At RGS 5 2 5 logging of the hostname was added to the HPRemote log In Figure 9 3 a connection has been established to the Sender from a Local Computer with IP address 16 125 19 100 port number 1069 and hostname HP18009285527 Figure 9 3 Reporting of the Local Computer IP address port number and hostname when a connection is made to the Sender Event Properties Event Date Source rgsender Time 11 26 57 PM Category None Type Information EvertiD 4 User NA Computer AGS SENDER Description Connect RGS SENDER Vocal user from IF Address 16 125 19 100 1069 Hostname HP18009205527 IP address hostname port number 9 2 Usages of the HPRemote log The HPRemote log has several important usages e Troubleshooting The HPRemote log can be used to aid troubleshooting of connection issues between the RGS Sender and Receiver If you re unable to view the HPRemote log because of RGS connection difficulties Microsoft Remote Desktop can be used to connect to the Remote Computer to view the HPRemote log e Automatic Remote Application Termination Network outages or loss of connectivity between a Remote and Local Computer can leave a remote desktop
306. w is larger than the Local Computer monitor the window will extend off the monitor Regardless of the size of the Remote Display Window that is whether it fits on the Local Computer monitor or extends off the monitor if the local user resizes the Remote Display Window to be smaller than when it was originally created scroll bars will be added to allow the local user to view the complete Remote Computer frame buffer see Figure 2 6 RGS overview 22 Figure 2 6 Addition of scroll bars if the Remote Display Window is resized smaller Local Computer Remote Computer Receiver Sender u y Scroll bars are created if the Remote Display Window is resized smaller than when it was originally created stat Ef NOTE RGS does not provide a scale to fit capability to allow the contents of the Remote Computer frame buffer to be scaled to fit the Local Computer monitor If the Remote Computer frame buffer is larger than the Local Computer monitor the Remote Display Window will simply extend beyond the edges of the monitor If the Remote Display Window is resized to fit on the monitor scroll bars will be added RGS overview 23 2 8 3 Many to one connection The RGS Receiver supports a many to one connection allowing a single Local Computer to connect to multiple Remote Computers see Figure 2 7 each running a desktop session see Section 2 11 RGS operating modes specitically Directory Mode The frame buffer of each Remo
307. ware View 4 0 when RGS 5 2 5 or newer on Windows XP Professional available SP2 and SP3 A 1 VMware ESX networking considerations Networking configuration in general can have a significant impact on RGS pertormance In virtual environments this is extended to the ESX network stack The ESX network stack if improperly configured can significantly impact the quality of audio and video streaming from VDI sessions The best practice for ESX network configuration is to configure one or more physical NICs for RGS traffic These NICs should not be used for service console NFS iSCSI or VMotion General VM network traffic such as Internet access may use the same network interface as RGS if network topology requires it A 2 Using RGS with static HP VDI Static HP VDI is a one for one replacement of a desktop computer by a virtual machine directly connected to a user on a client computer To install RGS in a static HP VDI environment perform the following three steps these steps are expanded on subsequently 1 Create a new virtual machine complete with Windows XP Professional and applications 2 Modify the ESX configuration file for the virtual machine to support RGS 3 Install and configure the RGS Sender on the virtual machine These steps are described in the next three sections A 2 1 Create a new virtual machine Create a new virtual machine by performing the following steps 1 Create a new virtual machine for Windows XP Profes
308. was received to two user settable Receiver network timeout properties e Receiver warning timeout property e Receiver error timeout property 2 Sender network timeout property After the Receiver has established a connection to the Sender the Receiver likewise transmits sync pulses to the Sender every second to permit the Sender to also determine connection integrity If the Sender fails to detect the sync pulses the Sender compares the time since the last sync pulse was received to the user settable Sender network timeout property 3 Dialog timeouts Dialog timeouts control how long user interactions between the Sender and Receiver are allowed to take The Receiver and Sender network timeout properties are discussed in the next section Dialog timeouts are discussed in Section 6 4 2 Dialog timeouts 6 4 1 Network timeouts RGS uses TCP IP over a standard computer network to transmit data Although TCP IP is a reliable transport mechanism it does not guarantee network packet delivery The TCP IP network stack performs well on a relatively stable network However network issues beyond RGS can affect the probability and timing of network packet delivery Possible network issues include e Network over subscription resulting in congestion and packet loss e CPU utilization by other processes and tasks starving the TCP IP network stack e Incorrectly configured or malfunctioning network switches routers and NICs e A disconne
309. wered by a voice recognition system and if you re asked to provide the name of the product please say Remote Graphics Software not RGS 1 6 1 Software Service Strategy for Non HP Hardware RGS 5 3 and above is designed for and compatible with Microsoft Windows operating systems on hosted OS Virtual Machine and physical machine environments e Windows XP Professional 32 and 64 bit e Windows Vista Ultimate Business and Enterprise 32 and 64 bit RGS 5 3 is designed for and compatible with RHEL V4 and V5 32 and 64 bit operating environment on HP Blade Workstations and HP Personal Workstations Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software 15 Telephone support service is for RGS software installation and configuration support e Customer must have a fully functioning system with standard Microsoft Windows software loaded and running Software patch updates are available through Software Depot at http software hp com under Client Virtualization Software assurance enhancement upgrades are available through separate Software Assurance products 1 6 2 Other RGS Documents Other RGS documents such as the HP Remote Graphics Software Licensing Guide and the HP Remote Graphics Software RGS Session Information Interface Specification can be found at http www hp com support rgs_manuals Introduction to HP Remote Graphics Software 16 2 RGS overview Before exploring how to use RGS it s important to first understand the
310. y be entered after Ctrl Alt or Shift is pressed Setup Mode hotkey sequence is invalid The sequence has been reset to the default Setup Mode hotkey sequence is invalid The sequence has been disabled The key sequence specitied by the user contains invalid keys The Setup Mode hotkey sequence cannot start with a space The Setup Mode hotkey sequence specified using a property either on the command line or in the property configuration file is invalid and has been reset to the default The Setup Mode hotkey sequence specified using a property either on the command line or in the property configuration file is invalid and the property Rgreceiver Hotkeys IsMutable is disabled Therefore hotkeys have been disabled RGS error messages Connection denied The iLO remote console is enabled Unable to connect to Sender The Receiver was unable to resolve the specified hostname or IP Address Verify that you entered the value correctly Unable to connect to Sender The Receiver resolved the specified hostname or IP address but cannot connect to the Sender Verify that the system is accessible on your network and that the Remote Graphics Sender service has been started and is listening on a pubic IP address and is not blocked by a firewall The iLO remote console is enabled on the HP Blade Workstation The Blade must be configured in User Mode before connections are allowed This is usually indicative

HP Remote Graphics Software 5.3.0 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents